Home

Motorola DS6878 Barcode Scanner User Manual

1. IAU Send Control I KANAA Send Control J VATA Send Control K MAI Send Control L VTA Send Control M VARTA Send Control N VANTIN A Send Control O d AN Send Control P 17 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control Q Send Control R Send Control S Send Control T Send Control U Send Control V Send Control W Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 23 Control Characters continued A0 WI Send Control X VTL Send Control Y 008 Ir Ai Send Control Z VATA Send Control d it Send Control VAN A Send Control 17 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control 6 Send Control Keyboard Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send Send Space Send Se
2. OCR Orientation 180 Clockwise 2 OCR Orientation 90 Clockwise 3 OCR Orientation Omnidirectional 4 14 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Lines Parameter 691 To select the number of OCR lines to decode scan one of the following bar codes Selecting Visas Passport TD1 or TD2 ID cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines Also see OCR B Variant on page 14 6 OCR 1 Line 1 OCR 2 Lines 2 OCR Minimum Characters Parameter 689 OCR 3 Lines 3 To select the minimum number of OCR characters not including spaces per line to decode scan the following bar code then scan a three digit number between 003 and 100 using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting representing the number of OCR characters to decode Strings of OCR characters less than the minimum are ignored The default is 003 OCR Minimum Characters OCR Programming 14 13 OCR Maximum Characters Parameter 690 To select the maximum number of OCR characters including spaces per line to decode s
3. Beep LED After Transmission Beep LED After CTS Pulse Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character and then an error beep sounds on the digital scanner Send Bar Code with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters 8 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide ASCII Character Set for RS 232 The values in Table 8 4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1000 U NUL 1001 A SOH 1002 B STX 1003 C ETX 1004 D EOT 1005 E ENQ 1006 F ACK 1007 G BELL 1008 H BCKSPC 1009 I HORIZ TAB 1010 J LF NW LN 1011 K VT 1012 L FF 1013 M CR ENTER 1014 N SO 1015 O SI 1016 P DLE 1017 Q DC1 XON 1018 R DC2 1019 S DC3 XOFF 1020 T DC4
4. 250 msec 25 300 msec 30 400 msec 40 500 msec 50 600 msec 60 750 msec 75 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 13 Night Mode For DS6878 HC units only manufactured after xx xx 2013 The Night Mode feature allows the user to easily switch to a quiet mode in order to use the pager motor with the beeper off Enter and exit Night Mode in one of two ways e If Night Mode Trigger is enabled you can use the trigger to toggle between entering and exiting Night Mode To do this point the digital scanner away from a bar code and pull the trigger until the beam goes off Continue to pull the trigger for an additional 5 seconds lt J NOTE After decoding a bar code pulling the trigger an additional 5 seconds has no affect e Scan the Night Mode Toggle bar code to enter or exit Night Mode regardless of the state of the Night Mode Trigger parameter Entering Night Mode makes the following changes to the digital scanner e Decode Pager Motor is enabled e Beep After Good Decode is disabled e Beep on Insertion is disabled e Scanning the pairing bar code activates the pager motor instead of the warble beep and on pairing connection the pager motor activates again Also note the following scanner behavior regarding night mode e Exiting Night Mode returns the scanner to the previously programmed states for th
5. Portuguese Brazilian Windows 7 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data No Delay Medium Delay 20 msec Long Delay 40 msec USB CAPS Lock Override This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device When enabled the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows ASCIl keyboard type and can not be disabled Override Caps Lock Key Enable Do Not Override Caps Lock Key Disable USB Interface 7 11 USB Ignore Unknown Characters This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device and IBM device Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character then the digital scanner issues an erro
6. 1 sec 17 2 secs 18 3 secs 19 4 secs 20 5 secs 21 5 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner Activity Modes The digital scanner is capable of four modes of activity e Active Mode The digital scanner uses full illumination for active scanning e Idle Mode In presentation mode only the digital scanner s illumination dims after a programmable time period See Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode on page 5 23 The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted or senses motion upon presentation of a bar code or upon a trigger pull e Sleep Mode In presentation mode only the digital scanner s illumination shuts off after a programmable time period after Idle Mode has expired See Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode on page 5 25 The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted or senses motion upon presentation of a bar code depending on ambient light conditions or upon a trigger pull e Low Power Mode The digital scanner enters a low power consumption mode after Sleep Mode has expired in which the LEDs turn off in order to conserve energy and prolong the life of the scanner See Low Power Mode In hand held mode this occurs immediately after the programmed Time Delay to Hand held Low Power Mode In presentation mode this occurs after idle mode and sleep mode The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted senses a trigger pull or when the host attempts to communic
7. USB Interface 7 13 Quick Keypad Emulation This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device and if Emulate Keypad is enabled This parameter enables a quicker method of keypad emulation where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard The default value is Disable Enable Disable USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device When enabled this allows replacement of any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user see ENT Substitution Values on page 5 50 to set the Key Category and Key Value Enable FN1 Substitution Disable EN Substitution 7 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Static CDC When disabled each device connected consumes another COM port first device COM1 second device COM2 third device COM3 etc When enabled each device connects to the same COM port Enable USB Static CDC Disable USB Static CDC Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control key sequences see Table 7 2 on page 7 19 When this parameter is enabled the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping Table en
8. Disable Korean 3 of 5 0 Symbologies 15 59 Inverse 1D Parameter 586 This parameter sets the 1D inverse decoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes Regular 0 Inverse Only 1 Inverse Autodetect 2 15 60 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Postal Codes US Postnet Parameter 89 To enable or disable US Postnet scan the appropriate bar code below Enable US Postnet 1 Disable US Postnet 0 US Planet Parameter 90 To enable or disable US Planet scan the appropriate bar code below Enable US Planet 1 Disable US Planet 0 Symbologies 15 61 Transmit US Postal Check Digit Parameter 95 Select whether to transmit US Postal data which includes both US Postnet and US Planet with or without the check digit Transmit US Postal Check Digit 1 Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit 0 UK
9. Disable No Read 0 5 52 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval Parameter 1118 The digital scanner supports sending Unsolicited Heartbeat Messages to assist in diagnostics To enable this feature and set the desired unsolicited heartbeat interval scan one of the time interval bar codes below or scan Set Another Interval followed by four numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes scan sequential numbers that correspond to the desired number of seconds Scan Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval to turn off the feature The heartbeat event is sent as decode data with no decode beep in the form of MOTEVTHB nnn where nnn is a three digit sequence number starting at 001 and wrapping after 100 J NOTE For proper operation disable Low Power Mode on page 5 20 10 seconds 10 1 minute 60 Set Another Interval Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval 0 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 53 Dump Scanner Parameters To debug scanner issues scan the bar code below to output all the scanner s asset tracking information and parameter settings This outputs information a text document in human readable format Scan Dump Scanner Parameters with the scann
10. Radio Communications 4 17 Auto reconnect Feature When in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication This can happen if the digital scanner goes out of range with the remote device or if the remote device powers down The digital scanner tries to reconnect for the period of time specified by the Reconnect Attempt Interval setting During that time the green LED continues to blink If the auto reconnect process fails due to page time outs the digital scanner sounds a page timeout beep long low long high and enters low power mode The auto reconnect process can be re started by pulling the digital scanner trigger If the auto reconnect process fails because the remote device rejects the connection attempt the digital scanner sounds a connection reject beep sequence see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 and deletes the remote pairing address If this happens a pairing bar code must be scanned to attempt a new connection to the remote device J NOTE f a bar code is scanned while the auto reconnect sequence is in process a transmission error beep sequence sounds and the data is not transmitted to the host After a connection is reestablished normal scanning operation returns For error beep sequence definitions see Beeper Definitions on page 2 1 The digital scanner h
11. Exclude Wi Fi Channel 6 Exclude Wi Fi Channel 11 Exclude Wi Fi Channels 1 6 and 11 Exclude Wi Fi Channels 1 and 6 Exclude Wi Fi Channels 1 and 11 Exclude Wi Fi Channels 6 and 11 4 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Host Parameters The digital scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile In this mode the digital scanner can interact with Bluetooth enabled hosts supporting the HID profile as a Bluetooth keyboard Scanned data is transmitted to the host as keystrokes Following are the keyboard parameters supported by the HID host Apple iOS HID Feature This option enables Apple iOS devices to open and close the iOS virtual keyboard by double pressing the trigger J NOTE When this feature is enabled the digital scanner may be incompatible with non Apple iOS devices Disable Enable Android HID Feature This option allows simple Bluetooth pairing to the Android without requiring a PIN code Disable Enable Radio Communications 4 11 HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to th
12. OCR Programming 14 9 Enable Disable MICR E13B Parameter 682 To enable or disable MICR E13B scan one of the following bar codes MICR E 13B uses the following characters Ob 23456 789I TOAD characters Transit On Us Amount and Dash output as the following representative characters outputs as t outputs as a outputs as o outputs as d Enable MICR E13B 1 Disable MICR E13B 0 14 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable Disable US Currency Serial Number Parameter 683 To enable or disable US Currency Serial Number scan one of the following bar codes Enable US Currency 1 Disable US Currency 0 OCR Orientation Parameter 687 Select one of five options to specify the orientation of an OCR string to be read e 0 to the imaging engine default e 270 clockwise or 90 counterclockwise to the imaging engine e 180 upside down to the imaging engine e 90 clockwise to the imaging engine e Omnidirectional Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes OCR Programming 14 11 OCR Orientation continued OCR Orientation 0 0 OCR Orientation 270 Clockwise 1
13. 15 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Enable Disable Code 39 Parameter 0 To enable or disable Code 39 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 39 1 Disable Code 39 0 Enable Disable Trioptic Code 39 Parameter 13 Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Trioptic Code 39 1 Disable Trioptic Code 39 0 J NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously Symbologies 15 29 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Parameter 86 Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32 PY NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 1 Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 0 Code 32 Prefix Parameter 231 Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character A to all Code 32 bar codes J NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function Enable Code 32 Prefix 1 Disable Code 32 Prefix 0
14. Parameter eae Default KA UCC Coupon Extended Code 85 Disable 15 21 Coupon Report 730 New Coupon Format 15 22 ISSN EAN 617 Disable 15 22 Code 128 Code 128 8 Enable 15 23 Set Length s for Code 128 209 210 Any Length 15 25 GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 14 Enable 15 25 ISBT 128 84 Enable 15 25 ISBT Concatenation 577 Disable 15 26 Check ISBT Table 578 Enable 15 27 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 10 15 27 Code 39 Code 39 0 Enable 15 28 Trioptic Code 39 13 Disable 15 28 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Italian Pharmacy 86 Disable 15 29 Code Code 32 Prefix 231 Disable 15 29 Set Length s for Code 39 18 19 2 to 55 15 30 Code 39 Check Digit Verification 48 Disable 15 31 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 43 Disable 15 31 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 17 Disable 15 32 Buffer Code 39 113 Disable 15 32 Code 93 Code 93 9 Disable 15 35 Set Length s for Code 93 26 27 4 to 55 15 35 Code 11 Code 11 10 Disable 15 37 Set Lengths for Code 11 28 29 4 to 55 15 37 Code 11 Check Digit Verification 52 Disable 15 39 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s 47 Disable 15 40 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continued Parameter sl toed Default SE Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF 6 Disable 15 41 Set Lengths for
15. 17 40 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parsing Rule Example continued 7 Last Name 8 Send Enter Key 9 Mailing Address Line 1 10 Send Space 11 Mailing Address Line 2 12 Send Enter Key Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 41 Parsing Rule Example continued 13 Mailing Address City 14 Send Space 15 Mailing Address State 16 Send Space 17 Mailing Address Postal Code 17 42 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parsing Rule Example continued 18 Send Enter Key 9 1 Birth Date 20 Send Enter Key 21 Save Driver s Licence Parse Rule Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 43 Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format Last Name First Name 1 Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule 2 Last Name 3 Send 4 Send Space 5 First Name 6 Save
16. Desk Wall Mount Converter Knob Figure 1 10 Horizontal Mount Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Vertical Cradle Mount When mounting the cradle vertically 1 Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage 2 Ensure the convertible mount hook on the front of the cradle is inserted with the hook facing up If not remove and reverse the hook so that it is in position to secure the digital scanner in place See Figure 1 3 on page 1 4 for the location of the convertible mount hook Getting Started 1 13 3 Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1 11 Desk Wall S Mount 7 Converter Knob Figure 1 11 Vertical Mount Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Inserting Removing Digital Scanner in the CR0078 P Cradle To insert the scanner in the cradle 1 Insert the scanner by placing the bottom of the scanner at a slight forward angle into the CRO078 P cradle 2 Push the handle back and down until it clicks engaging the contacts of the scanner and cradle Figure 1 12 nserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle 1 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide To remove the scanner from the cradle 1 Remove the scanner by pushing the scanner slightly forward and up out of the CR0078 P cradle Figure 1 13 Removing the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Getting Started 1 15 Charging the Digital S
17. RS 232 Interface 8 15 RTS Line State This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High RTS line state Host Low RTS Host High RTS Beep on lt BEL gt Point to Point Mode Only When this parameter is enabled the digital scanner issues a beep when a lt BEL gt character is detected on the RS 232 serial line lt BEL gt is issued to gain a user s attention to an illegal entry or other important event J NOTE This parameter is not supported in Multipoint to Point mode Beep On lt BEL gt Character Enable Do Not Beep On lt BEL gt Character Disable 8 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Intercharacter Delay This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions Kan Minimum 0 msec Low 25 msec Medium 50 msec High 75 msec Maximum 99 msec RS 232 Interface 8 17 Nixdorf Beep LED Options When Nixdorf Mode B is selected this indicates when the digital scanner beeps and turns on its LED after a decode Normal Operation Beep LED immediately after decode
18. Locked Pairing Mode Lock Override Lock Override overrides a locked digital scanner base pairing and connects a new digital scanner In Multipoint to Point mode this unpairs any disconnected out of range digital scanner first in order to connect the new digital scanner To use Lock Override scan the bar code below followed by the pairing bar code on the cradle LockOverride 4 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pairing Methods There are two pairing methods The default method allows the digital scanner and cradle to pair connect when the pairing bar code on the cradle is scanned A second method pairs the digital scanner and cradle when the digital scanner is inserted in the cradle To enable this feature scan Enable Pair On Contacts below With this feature enabled it is not necessary to scan the pairing bar code on the cradle If the pairing is successful a low high connection beep sequence sounds a few seconds after the digital scanner is placed in the cradle See Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 for other beep sequences To enable or disable pairing on contacts scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Pair On Contacts Disable Pair on Contacts Unpairing Unpair the digital scanner from the cradle or PC host to make the cradle available for pairing with another digital scanner S
19. 14 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Product Add Right to Left Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of these products is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132459 check digit is 9 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 9 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 15 8 12 10 9 Productadd 6 15 8 12 10 9 60 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 the remainder is 0 Product Add Right to Left Digit Add Left to Right 1 Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit m
20. RTS CTS Option 3 8 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Software Handshaking This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to or instead of that offered by hardware handshaking There are five options If Software Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled Hardware Handshaking takes precedence None Data is transmitted immediately No response is expected from host ACK NAK After transmitting data the digital scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host When the digital scanner receives a NAK it re transmits the data and waits for either an ACK or NAK After three unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The digital scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time out to receive an ACK or NAK If the digital scanner does not get a response in this time it issues an error indication and discards the data There are no retries when a time out occurs ENQ The digital scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data If an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time out the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Time out to prevent transmission errors ACK NAK with ENQ This combines the two previous options For re t
21. Send G Send I Send K Send M Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 31 Keyboard Characters continued VATA Send N AA WT Send O VANTIN Send P VIII Send Q VTA Send R A0 VW Send S VANTIN Send T 17 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send V Send X Send Z Send U Send W Send Y Send Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 33 Keyboard Characters continued 008 WI Send VANTIN Send VAMC Send VT Send _ UTI Send IA Senda VANTIN Send b 17 34 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued VAT Sendc VANTIN Send d At Vital Send e NEI Send f IDN AN Send g VITO Send h VAT Send i Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 35 Keyboard Characters continued VAMC Send j AA HINN Send k MA MI Send VMTN Send m du allt Send n AA HIH Sendo KAANAA Send p 17
22. 0 e0 eee ee 5 6 parser version ID 17 16 PDF prioritization 5 31 PDF prioritization timeout 5 31 PDEA IVE Ad opted edna De Raw Ae A Rw od 15 74 picklist modes 5 28 postal aromat aeiee r A EE Bee cha ed 15 60 prefix suffix values 5 48 presentation mode field of view 5 36 presentation performance mode 5 19 OR de AA AER Saree hts 15 77 QR inverse 0 000 cece eee eee 15 78 radio communication 4 5 radio output power saans s anaana naran 4 22 reconnect attempt beep 4 18 reconnect attempt interval 4 19 RS 232 baud rie 8 8 DEED ON 2 TEE beta Wes 8 15 check receive errors 8 10 data bits ohana deni gidas de Ae EE faa a4 8 9 hardware handshaking 8 10 8 11 host serial response time out 8 14 host types 8 6 8 7 ignore unknown characters 8 17 intercharacter delay 8 16 Nixdorf Beep LED options 8 17 Dally a ety dd axe pedo dad eu at head dea 8 9 RTS line state 0 8 15 software handshaking 8 12 scan data options 5 49 scanner to cradle support 4 21 set defaults 5 5 set pin code 4 30 signature capture 6 16 signature capture height 6 19 signature capture JPEG quality 6 19 signature capture width
23. Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII By default any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If this parameter is enabled the data sent to the wand interface is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII This setting requires that the host be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a digital scanner emulation host With digital scanner emulation the cradle connects either to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point of Sale POS terminal Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks CN adi _ Parameter Process Indicates Default dnd Pass Through F eature Option 12 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting Using Scanner Emulation J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host
24. 6 19 simulated caps lock 0 4 16 snapshot aiming pattern 6 7 snapshot mode timeout 6 7 supplementals 15 10 symbologieS 0 0 0 eee eee eee 15 2 time delay to presentation idle mode oser aaa tk AECH Heed 5 23 5 24 time delay to presentation sleep mode 05 5 25 5 26 timeout between decodes different symbols 5 33 timeout between decodes same symbol 5 33 transmit code ID character 5 47 transmit matrix 2 of 5 check digit 15 57 transmit no read message 5 51 transmit UK postal check digit 15 62 transmit US postal check digit 15 61 trigger modes 5 17 5 18 5 27 UCC coupon code 15 21 UCC coupon extended code 15 21 UK postal 0200 0 eee ee 15 61 unique bar code reporting 5 32 UNPAIl oiea tea eek oe eRe jae E 4 24 UPC composite mode 15 72 UPC EAN JAN supplemental AIM ID format 15 14 UPC EAN JAN supplemental redundancy 15 13 UPCA ME 15 7 UPC A preamble 0 cee eee 15 16 UPC A E E1 check digit 15 15 15 16 UPCE Ak Ee doe Ae ebe bed 15 7 UPC E preamble 0 0c eee 15 17 Te WEE 15 8 UPU FICS postal 15 66 US planet A sob ese eet d Ma Eed oe 15 60 US postnet 15 60 USB caps lock override 0 eee 7 10 convert Case 2
25. R 4 Top Left Bottom Right Where e R is the character R e 4 is 0x04 indicating there are four bytes thereafter to describe the region e Top Left are two values representing the top left corner of the region e Bottom Right are two values representing the bottom right corner of the region e By Code Type An element can specify a specific bar code symbology to find and decode somewhere in the field of view A code type element is constructed as C 2 Code Type Where e C is the character C e 2 is 0x02 indicating there are two bytes thereafter to describe the code type e Code Type is the desired symbology s parameter number see Chapter 15 Symbologies For single byte parameter numbers extend the value to two bytes by adding 00 before the parameter number User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 39 Defining Multicode Expression Notes When defining multicode expressions consider the following e Use the Code Type specifier if there are bar codes of more than one code type in view e Always use the Region specifier when there are multiple bar codes of the same code type e When transmission order is important the first element in the expression transmits first use either type to define the order e When there are unwanted bar codes in view filter them out in one of two ways e Use Code Type to specify only the target bar codes e Use Region to identify only the target
26. 4 15 72 configurations xvii conventions notational ea ANA SEN NENNEN da het ews xix cradle sesia S248 S084 cea ty ee Ra wears oe he 1 7 connecting 1 8 1 9 diagram 0 020 eee 1 4 1 5 inserting scanner 0e cee eae 1 12 interfaces e 1 2 MOUNLING sisarta ah aeear ghar ae En 1 10 DAMS SEET andes 1 4 1 5 DIMGUES yee ae ieee aa ate ee hal een EE 3 12 supply power 22200000 1 9 1 10 CFOPPING 4h eadendie ag E greed ened EE wraededic 6 7 6 8 D data matrix bar codes 15 76 decode zone 2 8 default parameters IN A 1 driver s license parsing 00 17 2 IBM 468X 469X 1 eee 10 3 imaging preferences 6 2 keyboard wedge 9 3 OGR yet cence ese aoe eed ase ae a 14 2 radio communication 4 2 Ee beer oe nares ee 8 3 scanner emulation 12 3 symbologieS 15 2 EE 7 4 user preferences 0 000 c cece eee 5 2 wand emulation 11 3 digital imager scanner defaults 4 22 2eeea eee a eee tee Yee S 6 2 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes discrete 2 OF 5 STT STEIER A 15 44 driver s license ADF parsing sample 17 43 date format 17 18 no separator 17 19 field parsing bar codes 17 4 17 5 17 6 gender format 17 17 parsing bar codes 17 3 parsing rule example 17 39 driver s license parsing default parameters 17 2 E encryption 4 3 4 31 error indications ack nak 1
27. Enable EAN 13 JAN 13 1 Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 0 Enable Disable Bookland EAN Parameter 83 To enable or disable Bookland EAN scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Bookland EAN 1 Disable Bookland EAN 0 J NOTE f you enable Bookland EAN select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 15 20 Also select either Decode UPC EAN Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals or Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 15 10 15 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals Parameter 16 Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions e g UPC A 2 UPC E 2 EAN 13 2 The following options are available If you select Ignore UPC EAN with Supplementals and the digital scanner is presented with a UPC EAN plus supplemental symbol the digital scanner decodes UPC EAN and ignores the supplemental characters If you select Decode UPC EAN with Supplementals the digital scanner only decodes UPC EAN symbols with supplemental characters and ignores symbols without supplementals If you select Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals the digital scanner decodes UPC EAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately If the symbol does not have a supplemental the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 15 13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there
28. Report Software Version 15 84 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Macro PDF Features Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file The scanner can decode symbols that are encoded with this feature and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data stored in up to 50 MacroPDF symbols CAUTION hen printing keep each Macro PDF sequence separate as each sequence has unique identifiers A Do not mix bar codes from several Macro PDF sequences even if they encode the same data When scanning Macro PDF sequences scan the entire Macro PDF sequence without interruption If when scanning a mixed sequence the digital scanner emits two long low beeps Low Low this indicates an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent symbology error Flush Macro Buffer This flushes the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point transmits it to the host device and aborts from Macro PDF mode Flush Macro PDF Buffer Abort Macro PDF Entry This clears all currently stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and aborts from Macro PDF mode Abort Macro PDF Entry Introduction Advanced Data Formatting ADF is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device Use ADF to edit scan data to suit requirements Implement ADF by scanning a related series of bar codes which
29. User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continued Standard Default Parameters A 5 Parameter Se Default sau USB Host Parameters USB Device Type N A USB Keyboard HID 7 5 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking N A Enable 7 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes N A North American 7 8 USB Keystroke Delay N A No Delay 7 10 USB CAPS Lock Override N A Disable 7 10 USB Ignore Unknown Characters N A Send 7 11 USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 N A Disable 7 11 Emulate Keypad N A Disable 7 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero N A Disable 7 12 Quick Keypad Emulation N A Disable 7 13 USB FN1 Substitution N A Disable 7 13 USB Static CDC N A Enable 7 14 Function Key Mapping N A Disable 7 14 Simulated Caps Lock N A Disable 7 15 Convert Case N A No Case Conversion 7 15 Ignore Beep N A Disable 7 16 Ignore Bar Code Configuration N A Disable 7 16 USB Polling Interval N A 8 msec 7 17 RS 232 Host Parameters RS 232 Host Types N A Standard 8 6 Baud Rate N A 9600 8 8 Parity Type N A None 8 9 Data Bits ASCII Format N A 8 Bit 8 9 Check Receive Errors N A Enable 8 10 Hardware Handshaking N A None 8 10 Software Handshaking N A None 8 12 Host Serial Response Time out N A 2 sec 8 14 RTS Line State N A Low RTS 8 15 Beep on lt BEL gt N A Disable 8 15 1User
30. We d like to know what you think about this Manual Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to 631 627 7184 or mail to Motorola Solutions Inc One Motorola Plaza M S B 10 Holtsville NY 11742 1300 Attention Data Capture Solutions Technical Publications Manager Important If you need product support please call the appropriate customer support number for your area Unfortunately we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above Manual Title please include revision level How familiar were you with this product before using this manual CT Very familiar CT Slightly familiar CT Not at all familiar Did this manual meet your needs If not please explain What topics need to be added to the index if applicable What topics do you feel need to be better discussed Please be specific What can we do to further improve our manuals Thank you for your input We value your comments MOTOROLA Motorola Solutions Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 USA 1 800 927 9626 http www motorolasolutions com MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners e e 0 0 2014 Motorola Solutions Inc All Rights Reserved weg A an www lDWholes
31. E E Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 9 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued G H l J K L E 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued HI M in N HI 0 NNN P HI Q R Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 11 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued AAN S UN T OI U N V N Ww X E 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued OU Y OW Z MAN a Ou b IM c d Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 13 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued MT e IMI f LI g IM h IM i j E 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued k l m n o p Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 15 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued IMAM q HI r Olm s IANN t MAAN u v E 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued MMT Ww N x OI y TUL Z ON Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 17 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued E 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table Ei ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table 1000 U CTRL 2 1001 A CTRL A 1002 B CTRL B 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRL E 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRL G 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1 1009 d CTRL I HORIZONTAL TAB
32. Symbologies 15 67 GS1 DataBar The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded and DataBar Limited The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 Parameter 338 Enable GS1 DataBar 14 1 Disable GS1 DataBar 14 0 GS1 DataBar Limited Parameter 339 Enable GS1 DataBar Limited 1 Disable GS1 DataBar Limited 0 J NOTE For HC configurations the default is Enable 15 68 DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar Expanded Parameter 340 Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded 1 Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded 0 Symbologies 15 69 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level Parameter 728 The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness Increasing the level of security may result in reduced aggressiveness in scanning so choose only that level of security necessary e Level 1 No clear margin required This complies with the original GS1 standard yet might result in erroneous decoding o
33. Table 4 41 Radio Communication Default Parameters Parameter Default ihe bas Variable Pin Code Static 4 30 Encryption Disable 4 31 Secure Simple Pairing IO Capability No Input No Output 4 32 SPP Server and SPP Master Host Mode Only Wireless Beeper Definitions When the digital scanner scans the pairing bar code it issues various beep sequences indicating successful or unsuccessful operations Table 4 2 defines beep sequences that occur during pairing operations For additional beeper definitions see Beeper Definitions on page 2 1 Table 4 2 Wireless Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Indication Four long low beeps Five high beeps 1 A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting 2 When communicating with a cradle the cradle acknowledges receipt of data If the acknowledgment is not received this transmission error beep sequence sounds Data may still have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Emitted every 5 seconds while a reconnection attempt is in progress See Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 17 High low high low beeps Pairing bar code scanned Low high beeps High low beeps Bluetooth connection established Bluetooth disconnection event Note When connected to a remote device
34. 1010 J CTRL J 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRLL 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRLN 1015 O CTRL O F 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Full ASCII E Code 39 Encode Character aa 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRLQ 1018 R CTRLR 1019 S CTRLS 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U CTRL U 1022 V CTRL V 1023 W CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 IA 1034 B j 1035 IC 1036 JD 1037 JE 1038 IF amp 1039 IG i 1040 H 1041 N 1042 IJ 1043 IK 1044 L The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent ASCII Character Sets F 3 Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1045 1046 1047 lo 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 o SO N DO oi A oi N o SO N OD oy A Ww N 1058 1059 1060 G lt N 3s 1061 H 1062 l gt 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A 1066 B 1067 C 1068 D 1069 E F G H 1070 1071 1072 I 0 7 m oj O w g
35. 15 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 39 Parameter L1 18 L2 19 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 39 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options J NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types enter a leading zero for single digit numbers e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 39 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 39 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar cod
36. 2 of 5 22 23 14 15 41 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49 Disable 15 43 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit 44 Disable 15 43 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 82 Disable 15 44 Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Discrete 2 of 5 5 Disable 15 44 Set Length s for D 2 of 5 20 21 12 15 45 Codabar NW 7 Codabar 7 Disable 15 47 Set Lengths for Codabar 24 25 5 to 55 15 47 CLSI Editing 54 Disable 15 49 NOTIS Editing 55 Disable 15 49 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop 855 Upper Case 15 50 Characters Transmission MSI MSI 11 Disable 15 51 Set Length s for MSI 30 31 4 to 55 15 51 MSI Check Digits 50 One 15 53 Transmit MSI Check Digit 46 Disable 15 53 MSI Check Digit Algorithm 51 Mod 10 Mod 10 15 54 Chinese 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 408 Disable 15 54 Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 618 Disable 15 55 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 619 620 1 Length 14 15 56 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 622 Disable 15 57 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623 Disable 15 57 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 11 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continued Parameter Se Default Te Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 581 Disable 15 58 Inverse 1D Inverse 1D 586 Regular 15 59 Postal Codes US Postnet 89 Disable 15 60 US Planet 90 Disable 15 60 Transmit US Postal Check Digit 95 Enable 15 61 UK Po
37. Caps Lock On When enabled the digital scanner emulates keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled Caps Lock Override takes precedence Enable Caps Lock On Disable Caps Lock On Caps Lock Override When enabled on AT or AT Notebook hosts the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps Lock key Therefore an A in the bar code is sent as an A no matter what the state of the keyboard s Caps Lock key Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled Caps Lock Override takes precedence Enable Caps Lock Override Disable Caps Lock Override 9 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert Wedge Data When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case Convert to Upper Case Convert to Lower Case No Convert Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences see Table 9 2 on page 9 13 When this parameter is enabled the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Enable Function Key Mappi
38. Digital scanner detects power when inserted into a cradle Note This feature is enabled by default and can be disabled see Beep on Insertion on page 5 10 Low high low high beeps Out of memory unable to store a new bar code Low high low beeps ADF transmit error High high high low beeps RS 232 receive error Parameter Menu Scanning Long low long high beeps Input error incorrect bar code or Cancel scanned wrong entry incorrect bar code programming sequence remain in program mode High low beeps Keyboard parameter selected Enter value using bar code keypad High low high low beeps Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting Long low long high long low long high beeps Out of host parameter storage space Scan Default Parameters on page 5 5 Image Capture Low beep Snapshot mode started or completed High low beeps Snapshot mode timed out Wireless Operation High low high low beeps Pairing bar code scanned Low high beeps Bluetooth connection established High low beeps Bluetooth disconnection event Note When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID if a disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned check the host device for receipt of transmitted data It is possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost Long low
39. J NOTE Only ONE driver s license parsing rule may be stored in memory at any time Saving a new rule replaces the prior rule To abort the programming sequence at any time during programming scan Quit Entering Driver s License Rule on page 17 4 Any previously saved rule is retained To erase a programmed saved rule scan Erase Driver s License Parse Rules on page 17 4 Embedded Driver s License Parsing Criteria Code Type After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver s license you can also apply standard ADF rules to the parsed data using the Parsed Driver s License criterion bar code in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide J NOTE Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver s license data when configured for Embedded Driver s License Parsing See Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example on page 17 43 for a sample ADF rule using this code type criterion 17 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule Save Driver s License Parse Rule Quit Entering Driver s License Rule Erase Driver s License Parse Rules Drivers License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 5 Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes continued The parse fields currently supported begin below Not all IDs present data in the same format For example some IDs may have separate fields for first name last name and middle initial and others may have
40. Night Mode Toggle For DS6878 HC units only manufactured after xx xx 2013 To toggle between entering and exiting Night Mode without using the trigger scan this bar code This functions regardless of the state of the Night Mode Trigger parameter When scanning this bar code the Pager Motor vibrates when entering Night Mode and the scanner emits 2 short beeps when exiting Night Mode Toggle Night Mode User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 15 Batch Mode Parameter 544 The digital scanner supports three versions of batch mode When the digital scanner is configured for any of the batch modes it attempts to store bar code data not parameter bar codes until transmission is initialized or the maximum number of bar codes are stored When a bar code is saved successfully a good decode beep sounds and the LED flashes green If the digital scanner is unable to store a new bar code a low high low high out of memory beep sounds See pages 2 7 2 3 and 4 3 for all beeper and LED definitions In all modes calculate the amount of data number of bar codes the digital scanner can store as follows Number of storable bar codes 30 720 bytes of memory number of characters in the bar code 3 J NOTE f the batch mode selection is changed while there is batched data the new batch mode will take effect only after all the previously batched data is sent
41. Parity A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character Select the parity type according to host device requirements e Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1 based on data to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character e Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to O or 1 based on data to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character e Select None when no parity bit is required Odd Even Data Bits ASCII Format None This parameter allows the digital scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7 bit or 8 bit ASCII protocol 7 Bit 8 Bit 8 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Check Receive Errors Select whether or not the parity framing and overrun of received characters are checked The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above Check For Received Errors Enable Do Not Check For Received Errors Disable Hardware Handshaking The data interface consists of an RS 232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines Request to Send RTS and Clear to Send CTS If Standard RTS CTS handshaking is not selected scan data is transmitted as it becomes available If S
42. Table G 2 User Defined CapCode Parameters Parameter Defined Width Number of pixels Height Number of pixels Format JPEG BMP TIFF JPEG quality 1 most compression to 100 best quality Bits Per Pixel 1 2 levels not applicable to JPEG format 4 16 levels 8 256 levels BMP format does not use compression JPEG and TIFF formats do Dimensions The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns The line width of the signature capture box is insignificant The thinnest element width referred to here as X is nominally 10 mils 1 mil 0 0254 mm Select this as an exact multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used For example when using a 203 DPI dots per inch printer and printing 2 dots per module the resulting X dimension is 9 85 mils Data Format The scanner output is formatted according to Table G 3 Symbol scanners allow different user options to output or inhibit bar code type Selecting Symbol ID as the bar code type for output identifies the CapCode with letter i Table G 3 Data Format File Format Image Size 1 byte Type 1 byte 4 bytes BIG Endian Image Data JPEG 1 See Table G 1 last Same bytes as in a data BMP 3 column file TIFF 4 G A DS6878 Product Reference Guide Additional Capabilities Regardless of how the signature is captured the output signature image is de skewed and right
43. To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability J NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for D 2 of 5 applications 15 46 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 continued D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length D 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths D 2 of 5 Length Within Range D 2 of 5 Any Length Symbologies 15 47 Codabar NW 7 Enable Disable Codabar Parameter 7 To enable or disable Codabar scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Codabar 1 Disable Codabar 0 Set Lengths for Codabar Parameter L1 24 L2 25 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Codabar to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Di
44. 0 ccc ees 8 12 ADF ears eee tne Ge a tne eyed ee a 3 4 Cl BEE 8 12 Leit EE 3 7 LBB TATA Acces eee a vi SNE EECH 3 5 miscellaneous scanner options 4 1 KEEN 3 5 RS 232 transmission 8 10 transmission 3 6 8 14 unknown characters 7 11 8 17 9 7 XOMO EE EE 8 12 exposure options gain exposure priority for snapshot mode 6 6 illumination 5 37 6 5 presentation mode field of view 5 36 G gain exposure priority for snapshot mode 6 6 GS1idatabar 2 4 ia added saa A eee eed 15 67 H HID Profiles sii ae maai 0c ce eee eee 4 6 HID Slaves i i246 628 Gait ee thou eee bed Sad 4 4 host types IBM port address 10 4 keyboard wedge 9 4 EE 8 6 8 7 scanner emulation 12 3 USB eit tee oss Bae oa a 7 5 7 6 wand emulation 11 4 l IBM 468X 469X connection 00 10 2 Index 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide IBM 468X 469X defaults 10 3 IBM 468X 469X parameters 10 4 illumination 0 2 0 0 ee ee 5 37 6 5 image brightness target white 6 10 image cropping 6 7 6 8 image enhancement 6 12 image options bits per pixel 00 02 eee aee 6 15 RODT aeiiao a aeaa ARTE ME 6 7 6 8 file formats 6 13 6 17 image brightness target white 6 10 image enhancement 6 12 image resolution 6 9 image rotation 6 14 JPEG image options 6 10 JPEG size quality 6 11
45. 4 17 4 22 4 26 B bar code defaults CUNEN A 1 IBM 468X 469X 0 0002 eee 10 3 keyboard wedge 9 3 radio communication 4 2 RS 232 EELER ST ead ahaa ap ae 8 3 scanner emulation 12 3 symbologies 15 2 USB SEENEN 7 4 user preferences 20000000e 5 2 wand emulation 11 3 AAMVA field parsing 000 0 ee 17 7 Android HID feature 4 10 Apple iOS HID feature 4 10 Australia post 15 63 Australia post format 15 64 authentication 4 29 auto reconnect in bluetooth keyboard emulation HID slave mode 4 20 auto reconnect interval 000 4 17 STEE als oka Sara Gh Sok ata Sk we ate AE AN 15 79 aztec iNVerse 0 0 es 15 79 batch mode 5 15 5 16 battery reconditioning 1 15 1 16 beep after good decode 5 6 beep on insertion 5 10 beeper tone 200020 cece eae 5 8 beeper volume 5 9 5 10 bits per pixel 2 0005 6 15 6 18 bluetooth friendly name 055 4 7 bluetooth security 4 29 bookland EAN 0 0 00 c eee eee eee 15 9 bookland ISBN 0000000e 15 20 buffering 15 32 15 33 cancel WEE D 3 Chinese 2 0f 5 kee 15 54 codabal ci E Pipe eee Cala a 15 47 codabar CLSl editing 15 49 codabar lengths 15 47 codabar NOTIS editing 15 49 codabar start an
46. Nothing happens when the trigger is No power to the digital scanner Check the system power If the pulled configuration requires a power supply re connect the power supply Check the battery Ensure that end cap to battery chamber is secured Interface power cables are loose Check for loose cable connections and re connect cables Digital Scanner is disabled For Synapse or IBM 468x mode enable the digital scanner via the host interface The laser aiming or illumination does No power to the digital scanner Check battery and charging contacts not appear when the trigger is ensure that end cap to battery chamber pulled is secured ensure all power and cable connections to cradle are secure Interface power cables are loose Check battery and charging contacts ensure power and cable connections to cradle are secure J NOTE f after performing these checks the symbol still does not scan contact the distributor or contact Motorola Solutions Support See page xx for contact information Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Table 3 2 Technical Specifications DS6878 Digital Scanner Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 7 3 in H x 3 85 in L x 2 7 in W 18 5 cm H x 9 7 cm L x 6 9 cm W Weight with battery Approximately 8 4 oz 238 g Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black HC Configuration He
47. Picklist mode is always enabled Disabled Always 0 Enabled in Hand held Mode 1 Enabled in Hands free Mode 3 Enabled Always 2 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 29 Mobile Phone Display Mode Parameter 716 This mode improves bar code reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays Enable this in hand held hands free or both modes or disable this mode Disable Mobile Phone Display Mode 0 Enable in Hand held Mode 1 Enable in Hands free Mode 2 Enable in Both Modes 3 5 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide FIPS Mode Parameter 736 The Federal Information Processing Standard FIPS 140 2 is a U S government computer security standard used to accredit cryptographic modules FIPS enabled DS6878 scanners and cradles offer this secure mode of operation J NOTE The CR0078 P cradle is required for FIPS mode To enable the FIPS mode of operation enabled by default scan the Enable FIPS bar code The scanner will attempt to establish a secure session with the cradle to which it is connected On success the scanner will ligh
48. Wi Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion 2 ccccccseecesecceeee tense sense sense sess seeaeeeceeeeeneneeseensceeneneeeeeeens 4 8 HID Host Parameters cccccccccecceccceee cee e cece cnet eee e eee e eee e tence ee EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE ianari Ai nena te ttt 4 10 Apple iOS HID Feature eeeee 4 10 Android HID Feature ee 4 10 HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes 022 ccecescecccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeserenseneces 4 11 Table of Contents vii HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay xisciicccdccecaavstcnticrnsanesaiunaeeniadernecaladchedeatentuate Ee SEENEN 4 13 EE eege eebe 4 13 HID Ignore Unknown e e 4 14 Emulate Keypad E 4 14 HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution Aesteet egene ee Eeer 4 15 AID F nction Key Mapping WEE 4 15 Simulated Caps LOCK cccccscccseccecccaeceaecaeceaeceaeceaeccaeceeccaeccaeceeeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeensneas 4 16 Conver Caso EE 4 16 Auto reconnect Feature EE 4 17 Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback cccccccccccceeeeeee cece ee ee eee e cette ett ette tees tneeeedeeeeeseeteeeeeeeeeees 4 18 Reconnect Attempt Internal 4 19 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode seese 4 20 Out of Range et e E 4 20 Digital Scanner s To Cradle Support gisssccescccasecvsddvecentictetaccaiap acd ducaiuevaarercesdicantecsddekeastdertecandaass 4 21 Modes of Operation c ccccsecesecceeccaeeeaeceeceaeceaeceeceaecceeceaecaeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee
49. e Security Level 2 Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes e Security Level 3 If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur select this security level Be advised selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis decoding severely out of spec bar codes Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the digital scanner If you need this level of security try to improve the quality of the bar codes Security Level 0 0 Security Level 1 1 Security Level 2 2 Security Level 3 3 Symbologies 15 83 Intercharacter Gap Size Parameter 381 The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small Due to various bar code printing technologies this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed preventing the digital scanner from decoding the symbol If this problem occurs scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out of specification bar codes Normal Intercharacter Gaps 6 Large Intercharacter Gaps 10 Report Version Scan the bar code below to report the version of software installed in the digital scanner
50. is transmitted as F04123 Code 93 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as G0012345678905 MSI 0 Check digits are sent 1 No check digit is sent Example An MSI bar code 4123 with a single check digit checked is transmitted as 1M14123 Standard Default Parameters B 5 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type Option Value Option D2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123 is transmitted as S04123 UPC EAN 0 Standard data packet in full EAN format i e 13 digits for UPC A UPC E and EAN 13 not including supplemental data Two digit supplemental data only 2 Five digit supplemental data only 3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN 13 UPC A or UPC E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol 4 EAN 8 data packet Example A UPC A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as JE00012345678905 Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as 1X0123456789X ISSN EAN 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example An ISSN EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as X0123456789X Code 11 0 Single check digit 1 Two check digits 3 Check characters validated but not transmitted GS1 DataBar No option s
51. nserting the Battery 4 With the contacts on the connector clips facing in the same direction attach the new battery s connector clip to the connector clip in the base of the digital scanner 5 Slide the new battery into the battery well and ensure the battery leads are visible The battery should sit securely in the well 6 Attach and close the latch 7 Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the digital scanner press down gently and turn the screw clockwise to lock the latch in place 1 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Insert the digital scanner in the cradle so that the metal contacts on the bottom of the digital scanner handle touch the contacts on the cradle Push the handle lightly to ensure a proper connection engaging the contacts in the cradle and digital scanner Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob on the back of the cradle is in the correct position for the horizontal or vertical mounting NOTE References to mounting the cradle only apply to the CRO078 S CRO008 S cradle not the CRO078 P JV cradle Inserting Digital Scanner in the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle Horizontal Cradle Mount When mounting the cradle horizontally where no fastening is necessary 1 Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage 2 Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1 10
52. see Table 2 1 on page 2 1 and Table 2 2 on page 2 3 for error indicators e Scanning the Multicode Expression bar code produces a two tone same pitch beep e Scanning each value of the expression produces a two tone same pitch beep e Scanning the End Of Message bar code produces a four tone high low high low beep e Check the expression for syntax errors e Try programming a simple expression to ensure the syntax is correct See Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions e Review Defining Multicode Expression Notes on page 5 39 for additional hints Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding Use the following suggestions if encountering problems using multicode mode e lf the digital scanner appears to decode any single bar code instead of the intended multiple bar codes ensure you enabled Multicode Mode on page 5 37 Programming the multicode expression does not enable multicode mode e When specifying Region ensure e Coordinates are within range the 0 100 decimal or 0x00 0x64 hexadecimal e Top Left is above Bottom Right Top Left is 0 0 0x00 0x00 hexadecimal and Bottom Right is 100 100 0x64 0x64 hexadecimal e Regions for two or more bar codes do not overlap e When specifying Code Type ensure the digital scanner supports the code type Try decoding a single bar code without using multicode If it does not decode try enabling the bar code type See Chapter 15 Symbologies e Experiment with si
53. 1056 1057 1058 IZ 1059 F 5 6 1055 7 8 9 o Oli NI oO on 1060 G A 1061 H 1062 l vV 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 I oi 7 m oj O w gt e I O ml m UO O W 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 Q U O Z TF zl S Di O Z S Tr KA E 9 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 7 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 A X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 Deh 1092 L 1093 DM 1094 N ge 1095 O _ 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C c 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L 1109 M m 1110 N n 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent USB Interface 7 23 Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 111
54. 15 53 lengis e he ae Bee Gea eet a ee ne hee 15 51 MSI e sid ream ead dala was 15 51 transmit check digit 15 53 multipoint to point communication 4 21 N non parameter attributes 2 H 1 beep on next bootup 4 H 4 beeperied H 3 configuration filename H 2 date of first programming H 2 date of manufacture aanus uaaa H 2 firmware version H 5 host trigger session H 4 imagekit version H 5 in cradle detection H 5 model number H 1 night mode H 2 operational mode H 6 pager motor on scanner H 3 parameter defaults 0 H 4 reboot 2 000 eee eee H 4 scankit version H 5 serial number H 1 notational conventions xix 0 OCR default parameters 2 220 14 2 parameters AN EE ee ee ea 14 3 out of range indicator 4 20 P pairing le lr 4 17 bar EE 1 4 2 2 4 3 bar code format 4 25 beeper definitions 4 3 charging cradle 1 7 connection maintenance interval 4 26 cradle host 0 d EH sete ys 4 4 lock override 4 23 lost connection to host 1 10 master ees 3 5 master slave setup nnana 4 6 MethOdS a EE Aedes ee ed ew fed Rad ae 4 24 MOdES fe At eg ALEN a 4 2 mulitpoint to point 2 4 4 21 ON ContaGtS A1 ere sada ae EEN hee das od 4 2 pin codes 222 2c eee eee eee 4 30 point to point 2 200000
55. 17 15 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Place of Birth Audit Information Inventory Control Race Ethnicity Std Vehicle Class S td Endorsements Std Restrictions 17 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Class Description Endorsement Description Restrictions Description Height in Inches Height in Centimeters Parser Version ID Bar Codes Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification Parser Version ID Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 17 User Preferences Set Default Parameter Scan this bar code to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table A 1 on page A 1 Set All Defaults Output Gender as M or F Scan this bar code to report the gender as M or F instead of a numeric value Output gender as M or F 17 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Date Format Use these bar codes to select the date format that is displayed Date fields include the following e CCYY 4 digit year CC 2 digit century 00 99 YY 2 digit year in the century 00 99 e MM 2 digit month 01 12 e DD 2 digit day of the month 00 31 The default is Date Format CCYYMMDD NOTE To specify a date separator i e a character separating each field of the date scan the Send lt character gt vV bar code that corresponds to the alphanumeric c
56. 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability 15 52 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for MSI continued V NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths MSI One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for MSI applications MSI One Discrete Length MSI Two Discrete Lengths MSI Length Within Range MSI Any Length Symbologies 15 53 MSI Check Digits Parameter 50 With MSI symbols one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader The second check digit is optional If the MSI codes include two check digits scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 15 54 for the selection of second digit algorithms One MSI Check Digit 0 Two MSI Check Digits 1 Transmit MSI Check Digit s Parameter 46 Scan a bar code belo
57. 20 UCC Coupon Extended Code 85 Disable 15 21 Coupon Report 730 New Coupon 15 22 Format ISSN EAN 617 Disable 15 22 Code 128 Code 128 8 Enable 15 23 Set Length s for Code 128 209 210 Any Length 15 23 GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 14 Enable 15 25 ISBT 128 84 Enable 15 25 ISBT Concatenation 577 Disable 15 26 Check ISBT Table 578 Enable 15 27 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 10 15 27 Code 39 Code 39 0 Enable 15 28 Trioptic Code 39 13 Disable 15 28 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Italian Pharmacy Code 86 Disable 15 29 Code 32 Prefix 231 Disable 15 29 Set Length s for Code 39 18 19 2 to 55 15 30 Code 39 Check Digit Verification 48 Disable 15 31 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 43 Disable 15 31 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 17 Disable 15 32 Buffer Code 39 113 Disable 15 32 Code 93 Code 93 H Disable 15 35 Set Length s for Code 93 26 27 4 to 55 15 35 Code 11 Code 11 10 Disable 15 37 Set Lengths for Code 11 28 29 4 to 55 15 37 Code 11 Check Digit Verification 52 Disable 15 39 15 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 15 41 Symbologies Default Parameters Continued Parameter e Gr Default a ae Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s 47 Disable 15 40 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF 6 Disable 15 41 Set Lengths for 2 of 5 22 23 14 15 41 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49 Disable 15 43 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit 44 Dis
58. 3 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3 2 Technical Specifications DS6878 Digital Scanner Continued Item Ambient Light Immunity Description Incandescent 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Sunlight 8 000 ft candles 86 000 Lux Fluorescent 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Mercury Vapor 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Sodium Vapor 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Immune to normal or artificial light Accessories Lanyard Lanyard attaches to the battery door Table 3 3 Technical Specifications CRO078 S CRO008 Cradle Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 2 0 in H x 8 35 in L x 3 4 in W 5 cm H x 21 1 cm L x 8 6 cm W Weight Approximately 6 4 oz 183 gm Voltage amp Current Charging Cradle VoltageCurrent 5 10 VDC 700mA External power 5 10 VDC 475 mA Host power through cable 12 10 VDC 300 mA External power 12 10 VDC 220 mA Host power through cable Non charging Cradle 5V 70mA or 12 V 50 mA Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black HC Configuration Healthcare White Power Requirements 4 75 14 0 VDC Performance Characteristics Interfaces Supported CR0078 S only Features on board Multiple Interface with RS 232C Standard Nixdorf ICL amp Fujitsu IBM 468x 469x Keyboard Wedge USB Standard IBM SurePOS Macintosh SSI Laser Wand Emulation 123Scan Remote Digital Scanner Management In additi
59. 36 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued VAT Send q IA Send r VATA Sends LL Sendt 084 Send u 0 WA Send v A0 A Send w Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 37 Keyboard Characters continued d AU Send x VAT Send y MA MI Send z MANA Send KANAAN Send ANOA Send VARTA Send 17 38 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Tab Key Send Enter Key Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 39 Parsing Rule Example Scan the following bar codes in sequence to program the digital scanner to extract and transmit first middle and last names mailing address line 1 mailing address line 2 mailing address city mailing address state mailing address postal code and date of birth Then scan a driver s license bar code af NOTE This example applies to RS 232 To use this example with a USB interface scan Enable Function Key Mapping on page 7 14 in place of the Send Control M Carriage Return bar codes 1 Embedded Driver s License Parsing 2 Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule 3 First Name Send Space Middle Name Initial Send Space
60. 4 6 SPP maeter A ena ea aa ak a ae aes 4 4 4 17 4 22 SPP Slave nacis daw i mae Ta cana koe ea Ee ae eee 4 4 stored data batch mode 5 15 SUPPO a ovate sal oath Meee Sha de ba aed XX symbology default parameters 15 2 symbology parameters 15 7 T technical specifications 3 9 troubleshooting 3 4 U unlocked pairing mode 4 23 unpacking unpairing n EEN 4 24 UPC EAN bar codes bookland EAN 0 0 cee ee eee 15 9 bookland IGBN 00 eeeee 15 20 check digit 15 15 15 16 convert UPC E to UPC A 15 19 convert UPC E1 to UPC A 15 19 EAN zero extend 15 20 EAN 13 JAN 13 0 0 0 0 00000 c eee eee 15 9 EAN 8 JAN 8 2 0 ee 15 8 ISSN EAN 0 2 ce eee 15 22 supplementals 0 00 00 15 10 UCC coupon extended code 15 21 UPCA EE 15 7 UPC A preamble 15 16 IIe GE 15 7 UPC E preamble 15 17 UPCE E nega seein boat voted 15 8 USB connection 7 2 USB defaults 7 4 USB parameters e 7 5 user preferences bar codes batch mode 0 0 ee eee 5 15 5 16 beep on insertion 5 10 set defaults 2 0 0 0 eee 5 5 user preferences defaults 0000000s 5 2 W wand emulation connection 11 2 12 2 wand emulation defaults 000005 11 3 wand emulation parameters 0 11 4 wi fi friendly mode 4 8 channel exclusion 4 8 Tell Us What You Think
61. Advanced Data Formatting ADF describes how to customize scanned data before transmitting to the host This chapter also contains the bar codes for advanced data formatting Chapter 17 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL describes how the DS6878 DL digital scanner can parse out information from the standard US driver s licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators AAMVA compliant ID cards Appendix A Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous digital scanner defaults Appendix B Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers ASCII character conversions and keyboard maps About This Guide D I e Appendix C Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes e Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values e Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes includes the bar codes representing the alphanumeric keyboard used when setting ADF rules e Appendix E ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables e Appendix G Signature Capture Code provides information on CapCode a signature capture code that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature e Appendix H Non Parameter Attributes provides non parameter attribute numbers and descriptions Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document e Italics
62. Aztec 574 Enable 15 79 Aztec Inverse 589 Regular 15 79 Symbology Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 78 1 15 80 Security Level 77 1 15 82 Intercharacter Gap Size 381 Normal 15 83 Report Version 15 83 Macro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer None None 15 84 Abort Macro PDF Entry None None 15 84 Symbologies 15 7 UPC EAN Enable Disable UPC A Parameter 1 To enable or disable UPC A scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPC A 1 Disable UPC A 0 Enable Disable UPC E Parameter 2 To enable or disable UPC E scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPC E 1 Disable UPC E 0 15 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable Disable UPC E1 Parameter 12 UPC E1 is disabled by default To enable or disable UPC E1 scan the appropriate bar code below J NOTE UPC E1 is not a UCC Uniform Code Council approved symbology Enable UPC E1 1 Disable UPC E1 0 Enable Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 Parameter 4 To enable or disable EAN 8 JAN 8 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable EAN 8 JAN 8 1 Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 0 Symbologies 15 9 Enable Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 Parameter 3 To enable or disable EAN 13 JAN 13 scan the appropriate bar code below
63. Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds Male DIN Connector Keyboard Connector Female DIN Keyboard Y cable Connector Figure 9 1 Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y cable To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y cable 1 2 oe NO pm PF YW Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector Attach the modular connector of the Y cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the CRO078 S CRO008 S Series Cradle on page 1 8 or Connecting the CRO078 P Series Cradle on page 1 9 Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y cable to the keyboard port on the host device Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y cable to the keyboard connector If needed attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y cable Ensure that all connections are secure Turn on the host system Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters on page 9 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors ill
64. Compatibles IBM AT Notebook Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 5 Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type If the keyboard type is not listed see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 9 8 North American French Windows French Canadian Windows XP 2000 French International German Windows French Canadian Windows 95 98 Spanish Windows 9 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes continued Swedish Windows Japanese Windows Italian Windows UK English Windows Portuguese Brazilian Windows Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 7 Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and
65. EAN 0 cccccccceccccccceecececeeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeetteess 15 70 EE EE EE ees sacs ates ievgeovcutre tee 15 71 CGomposite CC 15 71 Composite CC AIB EE 15 71 Composite TL C S9 RE 15 72 UPC Composite Mode ccccccecccecc eee eee cece teen eee t eee eta ta eeeaaeeeaaeaeaeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseesseenteees 15 72 Composite Beep Mode ccccccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteneeenenieees 15 73 GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 15 73 2D SyMDOlOg ES suiriri msnada Jet aaaatin niaaa Geena ini oani kaiaa T AAN ATRAE 15 74 Enable Disable PDF41 7 AE 15 74 Enable Disable Micro A 15 74 Code 128 Emulation cccccccccccecceceeeeeeee aeea naa ni aaea nEn Arad inni a eaaa pa ieta a iai nia 15 75 REI WE ir a e sheers eaeseseevaatuiad ive eoscu tens aeeteatevadte er seeeenstene 15 76 Data Matrix Inverse ccecccecc cee cee cece cece cece eee eee eae e ea ee eae eeae eae eeaeeeaeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeees 15 76 Ee 15 77 OR G de eege eeh eege ee 15 77 QR MISS E 15 78 IMIGKOOR EEN 15 78 EEN 15 79 El e 15 79 Redundancy Level siscavaccntcccssdusnereczantecantuiacd ecm dEieg ege Nice Eeer bag 15 80 Red ndancy EE 15 80 R dundancy E 15 80 Redundancy Level EE 15 80 Redundancy Level E 15 81 Securty E 15 82 Intercharacter Gap Size sossonsseesseessees
66. ECI protocol not implemented 2 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented 3 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol not implemented FNC1 implied in first position 4 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented FNC1 implied in first position 5 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol not implemented FNC1 implied in second position 6 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented FNC1 implied in second position Aztec 0 Aztec symbol C Aztec Rune symbol B 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 123ABC UPC EAN UPC A 100 0 AM 5 C 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide EAN 13 100 AIIM 40 Code 128 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234 Interleaved 2 of 5 12345678901231 Sample Bar Codes C 3 GS1 DataBar i NOTE GS1 DataBar variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below see GS1 DataBar on page 15 67 10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked 1234890hjio9900mnb GS1 DataBar Expanded 08672345650916 GS1 DataBar Limited C 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar 14 55432198673467 GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated KO 90876523412674 GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked i 78123465709811 GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni Directional ial PDF417 Data Matrix Sample Bar Codes C 5 Maxicode wer re Sch SA AOR ve A A e wae ERS OR Code US Postnet Terre SEN 0123456784 UK Postal Lklddddd
67. Full ASCII COnVerSion o oo cee eee eecececccececececececeecsecueeaueeaeeeaeeeuaeeuaeeceeeneeeneeeeeeeseeeneeeness 15 32 Table of Contents xiii Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store ccaisssancictetsavasxeicalannnieencaveus shsceddivadevacentarenicveldeiedmslcoseateevemnss 15 32 ele EE 15 35 Eriable Disable Code 93 EE 15 35 EE 15 35 Code WEE 15 37 SE a renee emer er reer eRe rere rere re eer ere rete eee re eer eee ee ete 15 37 Set Lengths tor Code EE 15 37 Code 11 Check Digit Verification EE 15 39 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits EE 15 40 NMSA 2 of S T E 15 41 Enable Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 EE 15 41 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of E 15 41 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification EE 15 43 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit entgegen gk oeggeee ek e EuE Eege EEN ENEE 15 43 Convert I2ofbtoEAN 13 15 44 Discrete 2 OFS DTF scusscntccacextasanccotechearkiateeeasaimedasaneatnades EE eebe 15 44 Enable Disable Discrete 2 of 5 E 15 44 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of tee ee deg See eer 15 45 Co dabar NW A EE 15 47 Enable Disable Codabar ccccccccceccecceeeeeeeee cette eect eee ee teste cent tent cede tag tgeegegeedeeeeseseeeeeeeeseeees 15 47 Set Lengths for EE 15 47 ESME EE 15 49 NOTIS Editing serieren aN nan r RN EE ERRETO 15 49 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters Transmission cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 15 50 MES e E E E E A 15 51 Enable Disable MSI ee 15 51 Set Lengths for MSI ER 15 51 MSI C heck Ke EE 15 53
68. Gently wipe all surfaces including the front back sides top and bottom Never apply liquid directly to the scanner Be careful not to let liquid pool around the scanner window trigger cable connector or any other area on the device 3 Be sure to clean the trigger and in between the trigger and the housing use a cotton tipped applicator to reach tight or inaccessible areas 4 Immediately dry the scanner window after cleaning with a soft non abrasive cloth to prevent streaking 5 Allow the unit to air dry before use Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications 3 3 Monthly Deen Cleaning Maintenance Keep your Motorola scanner and cradle in good working order with a regular comprehensive cleaning routine to remove the natural build up of dirt that occurs with everyday use on connectors and the scanner exit window as well as the main surfaces of the device 1 Housing Follow the instructions for daily cleaning and disinfecting above to give the housing a general cleaning 2 Scanner exit window Wipe the scanner exit window with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses 3 Scanner connector a Dip the cotton portion of a cotton tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol b Rub the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator back and forth across the connector on the Motorola scanner Do not leave any cotton residue on the connector Repeat at least 3 time
69. L2 21 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range The range for Discrete 2 of 5 lengths is 0 55 e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select D 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan D 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers
70. No Output Keyboard Only Radio Communications 4 33 Connecting an iOS or Android Product With the Digital Scanner Perform the following steps on each device to establish a link HID Keyboard Emulation On the DS6878 scan Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave on page 4 5 Next e On aniOS iPad iPhone select Settings gt General gt Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth On Choose the DS6878 digital scanner from the list of discovered devices This establishes a link allowing scanning into any application with keyboard entry e Onan Android Motorola ET1 Droid select Settings gt Wireless amp networks gt Bluetooth to turn Bluetooth on if not already on Select Bluetooth Settings and choose the DS6878 digital scanner from the list of discovered devices The DS6878 digital scanner normally displays as DS6878 xxxxxx where xxxxxx is the serial number IMPORTANT Android devices specifically the Motorola ET1 may require scanning a PIN to connect If so a PIN A displays on the device Scan Variable PIN Code on page 4 30 then re attempt connection A beep indicates the scanner is waiting for PIN entry Scan the PIN using the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page E 1 To delete incorrect scanned entries scan Cancel on page E 7 For more information see Variable PIN Code on page 4 30 4 34 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction If desired program the digital scanner to perform
71. Number ietcevscccineiaceietiidettesarstuaceesanlldevvteduadigeaadasisdacaneliatatdsduisdindsdabssiiatssdiensdanssdsbandencves H 1 Seral NUMDE M EE H 1 Date of Manufacture ccc cccccce cece cece cece cette eee tann e ete e eee EESE teaa aaa eeaaeaaeeeaeseeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeneeees H 2 Date of First Programming zatscectaredcsevectexcavannatouceataxesadteneauncee tude vines witvadeceehuanebetaooreecaadteebaunela H 2 Configuration Filename Age H 2 Night TE H 2 Pager Motor E E H 3 Ee ER EEEE EEEE ET A T EE AET H 3 Parameter Defaults essensie eaea arr a E r e ar E AE EE H 4 Beep on Next Bootup cccccccecceccceeeeee cece eect eee eeeee eee e ede ceca annan cad aaaeaeeaeseeeeeeeseeeseseseeseeeeees H 4 FREDOOW ug eegent H 4 Host rigger SESSION EE H 4 Sie Ee LEE H 5 SCANKIt Version 00 cceceeccceeceeeceeeeeeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee Ee EEE EENE KAEA AEE i i H 5 lmagekit VSrSIOM iiiiccaretcecncereninranabdotmedeuradnanacceninnienneiaveienncieseuendousincdendedxehninneteniumankeccadnunce H 5 In Cradle Detection H 5 Operational Mode H 6 Glossary Index Introduction The DS6878 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up operating maintaining and troubleshooting the DS6878 digital scanner and cradles Configurations This guide includes the following configurations DS6878 SR20001WR DS6878 SR20007WR DS6878 SR2F001WR DS6878 SR2F007WR DS6878 HC2000BWR DS68
72. Postal Parameter 91 To enable or disable UK Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UK Postal 1 Disable UK Postal 0 15 62 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Parameter 96 Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 1 Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 0 Japan Postal Parameter 290 To enable or disable Japan Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Japan Postal 1 Disable Japan Postal 0 Symbologies 15 63 Australia Post Parameter 291 To enable or disable Australia Post scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Australia Post 1 Disable Australia Post 0 15 64 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Australia Post Format Parameter 718 To select one of the following formats for Australia Post scan the appropriate bar code below e Autodiscriminate or Smart mode Attempt to decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding Tables J NOTE This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded d
73. SAM 1094 N A 1095 0 E 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C c 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H h 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L l 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 0 o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S s 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W w 1120 X x 8 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued ASCII Value PF laps EE ASCII Character 1121 Y y 1122 Z z 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S 1127 Undefined 7013 ENTER Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle for keyboard wedge host interface used to connect the cradle between the keyboard and host computer The digital scanner translates the bar code data into keystrokes and transmits the information to the host computer via the cradle interface The host computer accepts the keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard This interface adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input In this mode the keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks 5 Indicates Default North American Feature Option 9 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio
74. Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit Parameter 42 The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC E1 check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 1 Do Not Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 0 UPC A Preamble Parameter 34 Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC A preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code 0 for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 0 System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 1 System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER lt DATA gt 2 Symbologies 15 17 UPC E Preamble Parameter 35 Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC E preamble to the host device transmit Sys
75. Video Viewfinder mode when using auto exposure White and black are defined as 240 decimal and 1 respectively Setting the value to the factory default of 180 sets the white level of the image to 180 To set the Image Brightness parameter scan Image Brightness below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value Leading zeros are required For example to set an Image Brightness value of 99 scan 0 9 9 See Appendix Numeric Bar Codes for numeric bar codes 480 1 Image Brightness 3 digits JPEG Image Options Parameter 299 Select an option to optimize JPEG images for either size or for quality Scan the JPEG Quality Selector bar code to enter a quality value the digital scanner then selects the corresponding image size Scan the JPEG Size Selector bar code to enter a size value the digital scanner then selects the best image quality JPEG Quality Selector 1 JPEG Size Selector 0 Imaging Preferences 6 11 JPEG Target File Size Parameter 561 Type Word Range 5 350 This parameter defines the target JPEG file size in terms 1 Kilobytes 1024 bytes The default value is 160 kB which represents 160 Kilobytes CAUTION JPEG compress may take 10 to 15 seconds based on the amount of information in the target image Scanning JPEG Quality Selector default setting on page 6 10
76. a cellular device It is broadcast by the cellular device when accessing the cellular system Misread Misdecode A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol MRD Minimum reflective difference A measurement of print contrast N Nominal The exact or ideal intended value for a specified parameter Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value Nominal Size Standard size for a bar code symbol Most UPC EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications e g from 0 80 to 2 00 of nominal ODI See Open Data Link Interface Open Data Link Interface ODI Novell s driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher level protocols It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC Network Interface Controller It is capable of understanding and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can understand and process Open System Authentication Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm P PAN Personal area network Using Bluetooth wireless technology PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly Generally a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33 foot range Only devices within this limited area typically participa
77. and a stop character e The digital scanner issues a short high low high beep e The digital scanner erases the transmission buffer e No transmission occurs Clear Buffer S NOTE The Clear Buffer contains only the dash minus character In order to scan this command set Code 39 lengths to include length 1 15 34 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit Buffer There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer 1 Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below which includes only a start character a plus and a stop character 2 The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer e The digital scanner issues a low high beep Transmit Buffer 3 Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space e The digital scanner appends new decode data to buffered data e The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer e The digital scanner signals that it transmitted the buffer with a low high beep e The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer E NOTE The Transmit Buffer contains only a plus character In order to scan this command set Code 39 lengths to include length 1 Overfilling Transmission Buffer The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters If the symbol just read overflows the transmission buffer e The digital scanner indicates that it rejected the symbol by issuing three long high beeps e No transmission occurs The data in the buffer is not
78. bar codes e If the expression does not contain a Region specifier scanning angle and distance do not matter If you specify a region you must scan in a fixed orientation and at a fixed distance Because of this it is preferable to use the Code Type specifier rather than the Region specifier e When defining regions e Defining a region much larger than the bar code improves tolerance to scan distance and angle but can cause a decode of a nearby bar code instead of the target bar code Therefore for best performance define larger regions when only a few bar codes are in view and those in view are widely separated e Defining a region close to or smaller than the target bar code improves the probability of decoding this bar code rather than one nearby but scan distance and angle must be more accurate Therefore for best performance define small regions when many bar codes are in view or those in view are close together e Use Region elements to improve decode speeds by reducing the image area to search for the target bar code e Specifying Code Type may also improve decode speeds for some code types e Although you can scan parameter bar codes when multicode mode is enabled be aware of the following If the multicode expression defined a region s to scan a parameter bar code you must position the bar code within the first region defined in the expression In some cases this first region is not the center of the image and aiming at
79. bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 15 Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1052 1053 1055 1056 1057 1058 IZ 4 5 1054 6 7 8 9 o SO N DO on A 1059 F 1060 G lt 1061 H 1062 l gt 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 I oi 71 m oj Oj w gt Gi I 0 mim oj ojl 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 O Z Z T A S O Z Z T A S 1079 1080 P U 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 9 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII ae Code 39 Encode Character tL 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 A X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 AK 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N 2 1095 O _ 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C c 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H h 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L 1109 M m 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key
80. by a connection a page timeout a rejection beep or a transmission error beep Select this option to optimize battery life on the digital scanner and mobile device Note that auto reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands e Auto reconnect Immediately When the digital scanner loses connection it attempts to reconnect If a page timeout occurs the digital scanner attempts reconnect on a trigger pull Select this option if the digital scanner s battery life is not an issue and you do not want a delay to occur when the first bar code is transmitted Note that auto reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands e Disable Auto reconnect When the digital scanner loses connection you must re establish it manually Auto reconnect on Bar Code Data Auto reconnect Immediately Disable Auto reconnect Out of Range Indicator An out of range indicator can be set by scanning Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt on page 4 18 and extending the time using the Reconnect Attempt Interval on page 4 19 For example with Beep on Reconnect Attempt disabled while the digital scanner loses radio connection when it is taken out of range the digital scanner attempts to reconnect silently during the time interval set by scanning a Reconnect Attempt Interval When Beep on Reconnect Attempt is enabled the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress If the Reconnect At
81. code 15 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Coupon Report Parameter 730 Select an option to determine which type of coupon format to support e Select Old Coupon Format to support UPC A GS1 128 and EAN 13 GS1 128 e Select New Coupon Format as an interim format to support UPC A GS1 DataBar and EAN 13 GS1 DataBar e If you select Autodiscriminate Format the digital scanner supports both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format Old Coupon Format 0 New Coupon Format 1 Autodiscriminate Coupon Format 2 ISSN EAN Parameter 617 To enable or disable ISSN EAN scan the appropriate bar code below Enable ISSN EAN 1 Disable ISSN EAN 0 Symbologies 15 23 Code 128 Enable Disable Code 128 Parameter 8 To enable or disable Code 128 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 128 1 Disable Code 128 0 Set Lengths for Code 128 Parameter L1 209 L2 210 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 128 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range J NOTE hen setting lengths for
82. contains programming instructions or other data unique to the bar code pattern The digital scanner is paired to the cradle and transmits bar code data to the cradle via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support The cradle then sends that information via an interface cable to the host computer for interpretation e Charge only cradle This cradle serves as a stand and battery charger It does not contain a radio and has no communication capability J NOTE For more information about communication between the digital scanner cradle and host see Chapter 4 Radio Communications Table 1 1 outlines several main differences between the CR0078 S and CR0078 P cradles Table 1 41 Cradle Features Feature CR0078 S CR0078 P Scanning Hand held scanning Hands free or hand held scanning Bluetooth Bluetooth or Charge Only CR0008 S Bluetooth Pairing Pair up to 3 scanners per cradle Pair up to 7 scanners per cradle Paging Not available Ability to page misplaced scanner s Charging Charges via USB with no power supply Requires 12V power supply required requires ferrite if used with a 5V power supply in a healthcare environment Interfaces Supports most commonly used interfaces Supports most commonly used interfaces see Technical Specifications on page with the exception of Wand Emulation 3 9 for detailed list Scanner Emulation and Synapse FIPS Not available FIPS140 2 wireless security USB Cable Standard universal USB cable Requires
83. digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 2 2 4 5 9 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 10 8 12 10 9 Digit add 6 1 0 8 1 2 1 0 19 9 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 19 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 9 Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder 6 Health Industry HIBCC43 This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard Health Industry HIBCC43 9 14 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Inverse OCR Parameter 856 Inverse OCR is white or light words on a black or dark background Select an option for decoding inverse OCR e Regular Only decode regular OCR black on white strings only e Inverse Only decode inverse OCR white on black strings only e Autodiscriminate decodes both regular and inverse OCR strings Regular Only 0 Inverse Only 1 Autodiscriminate 2 Introduction This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features Before programming follow the instructions in To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner powers down J NOTE Most compu
84. discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan Matrix 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Matrix 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Matrix 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Matrix 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital s
85. eal a bed aes 15 78 mobile phone display mode 5 29 MSI Age ek Bereet ddd Ze 15 51 MSI check digit algorithm 15 54 MSI check digits 15 53 MSI lengths 0 00 15 51 MSI transmit check digit 15 53 multicode concatenation symbology 5 44 multicode mode 000 5 37 5 38 multicode mode concatenation 5 43 multicode troubleshooting 5 45 Netherlands KIX code 15 65 numeric bar codes 0 00 cee eee D 3 OCR bright illumination 14 15 check digit 14 25 check digit multiplier 14 26 check digit validation 14 27 default table 14 2 inverse OCH 14 32 NINES haa dca og Rha di dE eee ng A 14 12 maximum characters 14 13 MCREIB inch desis Ohba ale heb aes 14 9 minimum character 14 12 OCR EE 14 3 OCR A variant 2 222055 14 3 OCR B E tite EE EE ieee a 14 5 OCR B variant anaa anaana 14 6 orientation 14 10 parameters 14 3 quiet zone 22 200 2000 14 14 security level 0 00000000 14 13 SUDSEL 3 A age tande en etn E dae 4 14 14 template 2200000 22 eee 14 16 US currency serial number 14 10 page button 4 28 pager MOF ics aiaa gaa a a h 5 11 pairing methods 4 24 pairing modes 000 eee eee ee 4 22 parameter broadcast 4 22 parameter scanning
86. following must be successfully read twice before being decoded The following codes must be read three times Table 15 4 Redundancy Level 3 Codes Code Type Code Length MSI 4 characters or less D2o0f5 8 characters or less 12 o0f5 8 characters or less Codabar 8 characters or less Symbologies 15 81 Redundancy Level 4 The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded Table 15 5 Redundancy Level 4 Codes Code Type Code Length All All Redundancy Level 1 1 Redundancy Level 2 2 Redundancy Level 3 3 Redundancy Level 4 4 15 82 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Security Level Parameter 77 The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes which include the Code 128 family UPC EAN and Code 93 Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application e Security Level 0 This setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state while providing sufficient security in decoding most in spec bar codes e Security Level 1 This default setting eliminates most misdecodes
87. has the ability to enable disable code types When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed Disable Enable Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a wand emulation host This mode is used whenever wand emulation communication is needed The digital scanner cradle connects either to an external wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point of Sale POS terminal In this mode the digital scanner emulates the signal of a digital wand to make it readable by a wand decoder Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks CA Indicates Defaut Transmit Unknown Characters Feature Option 11 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting Using Wand Emulation J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds To perform Wand Emulation connect the cradle to a portable data terminal or a controller which collects the wand data and interpret
88. in which the digital scanner favors longer exposure time rather than higher gain to capture an image This ensures that the image is less noisy and produces fewer artifacts during post processing activities like image enhancement sharpening The mode is recommended for fixed mount fixed object image capture since the image acquired is susceptible to motion blur Scan Autodetect default to set a mode in which the digital scanner automatically selects Gain Priority or Low Exposure Priority mode for Snapshot Mode If the digital scanner is in a magnetic read switch enabled stand or it is configured in Blink Mode it uses Low Gain Priority mode Otherwise it uses the Low Exposure Priority mode Low Gain Priority 0 Low Exposure Priority 1 Autodetect 2 Imaging Preferences 6 7 Snapshot Mode Timeout Parameter 323 This parameter sets the amount of time the digital scanner remains in Snapshot Mode The digital scanner exits Snapshot Mode when you pull the trigger or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses To set this timeout value scan the bar code below followed by a bar code from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes The default value is 0 which represents 30 seconds values increment by 30 For example 1 60 seconds 2 90 seconds etc Snapshot Mode Timeout Sn
89. is no supplemental If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options the digital scanner immediately transmits EAN 13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters If the symbol does not have a supplemental the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 15 13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental The digital scanner transmits UPC EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately e Enable 378 379 Supplemental Mode e Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode NOTE f you select 978 979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes see Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 15 9 to enable Bookland EAN and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 15 20 Enable 977 Supplemental Mode Enable 414 419 434 439 Supplemental Mode Enable 491 Supplemental Mode e Enable Smart Supplemental Mode applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously e Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with a 3 digit user defined prefix Set this 3 digit prefix using User Programmable Supplementals on page 15 13 e Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 and 2 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with either of two 3 digit user defined prefixes Set the 3 digit prefixes using User Programmable Supplementals on page 15 13 e Smart Supplemental Plus User Pr
90. it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Motorola Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Motorola products MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This media or Motorola Product may include Motorola Software Commercial Third Party Software and Publicly Available Software The Motorola Software that may be included on this media or included in the Motorola Product is Copyright c by Motorola Inc and its use is subject to the licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola Inc The Commercial Third Party Software that may be included on this media or included in the Motorola Product is subject to th
91. long high beep sequence sounds This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host computer Serial Port Connection to Host Interface Cable Figure 8 1 RS 232 Direct Connection To connect the RS 232 interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the RS 232 interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the scanner cradle see Connecting the CRO078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle on page 1 8 or Connecting the CRO078 P Series Cradle on page 1 9 2 Connect the other end of the RS 232 interface cable to the serial port on the host 3 Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS 232 interface cable Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet 4 Select the RS 232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS 232 Host Types on page 8 6 5 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter lt J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 8 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host RS 232 Interface RS 232 Parameter Defaults Table 8 1 lists the defaults for RS 232 host parameters If any option needs to be changed scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions s
92. point communication 4 21 postal code 15 60 Australia post 15 63 Australia post format 15 64 Japan postal 15 62 Netherlands KIX code 15 65 transmit UK postal check digit 15 62 transmit US postal check digit 15 61 UK POStall A dont dad alee aka ee dents eA tao 15 61 UPU FICS postal 0 15 66 US planet cae eee Veet EEN sondage 15 60 US postnet 202s 15 60 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 15 65 POWE ccce eee eee 1 9 1 10 vVaAUSB EE 1 9 presentation mode field of view 5 36 0 QR code barcodes n nnana anana 15 77 quiet zone leading margin 11 4 R radio communication bluetooth technology profile support 1 7 1 17 defaults 4 2 host types a kak ee E EEN NM 4 4 4 5 multipoint to point 4 21 DAMNING EE tnd de etna Avda ed dred ane 1 17 point to point 4 21 reconnect attempt 4 19 reconnect attempt beep 4 18 range indicator 4 20 reconditioning battery bar code 1 15 1 16 reconnect attempt 4 19 reconnect attempt beep 4 18 removing battery 1 11 replacing battery 1 11 RS 232 connection 8 2 RS 232 defaults 8 3 RS 232 parameters 8 4 S sample bar codes code 128 seirena de pie a D em C 2 COJE 39 a had E Ap ee ees a eat C 1 GS1 DataBar 2 2 005 C 3 interleaved 2 ofb ae C 2 UPC E
93. power down the digital scanner J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging If not using a USB cable select a host type after the power up beeps sound See and for specific host information This is only necessary upon the first power up when connecting to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values A Feature Option Indicates default Enable Decode Aiming Pattern 2 Option decimal value 6 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to disable image capture illumination scan the Disable Image Capture Illumination bar code under Image Capture Illumination on page 6 5 The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters require scanning several bar codes See these parameter descriptions for this procedure Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults Table 6 1 lists the defaults for imaging preferences parameters To ch
94. produces a compressed image that is consistent in quality and compression time To set the JPEG Target File Size parameter scan JPEG Target File Size below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value Leading zeros are required For example to set a JPEG target file size value of 99 scan 0 9 9 in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes JPEG Target File Size 3 digits JPEG Quality and Size Value JPEG Quality Parameter 305 If you selected JPEG Quality Selector scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 5 to 100 where 100 represents the highest quality image JPEG Quality Value Default 065 5 100 Decimal 6 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Image Enhancement Parameter 564 This parameter configures the digital scanner s Image Enhance feature This feature uses a combination of edge sharpening and contrast enhancement to produce an image that is visually pleasing The levels of image enhancement are e Off 0 Default e Low 1 e Med 2 e High 3 Off 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High 3 Imaging Preferences 6 13 Image File Format Selector Parameter 304 Select an image format appropriate for the system BMP TIFF or JPEG The digital scanner stores captured images in the select
95. programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 5 to 9 9 seconds The default timeout is 9 9 seconds To set a Decode Session Timeout scan the bar code below Next scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers For example to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0 5 seconds scan the bar code below then scan the 0 and 5 bar codes To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Decode Session Timeout Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol Parameter 137 Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Code Read to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a symbol is left in the digital scanner s field of view The bar code must be out of the field of view for the timeout period before the digital scanner reads the same consecutive symbol It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 0 to 9 9 seconds The default interval is 0 5 seconds To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval in 0 1 second increments Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols Parameter 144 Use this option in presentation mode and Conti
96. selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continued Parameter jaa Default SE Intercharacter Delay N A 0 msec 8 16 Nixdorf Beep LED Options N A Normal Operation 8 17 Ignore Unknown Characters N A Send Bar Code 8 17 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type N A IBM PC AT amp IBM PC 9 4 Compatibles Country Types Country Codes N A North American 9 5 Ignore Unknown Characters N A Send 9 7 Keystroke Delay N A No Delay 9 7 Intra Keystroke Delay N A Disable 9 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation N A Disable 9 8 Caps Lock On N A Disable 9 9 Caps Lock Override N A Disable 9 9 Convert Wedge Data N A No Convert 9 10 Function Key Mapping N A Disable 9 10 FN1 Substitution N A Disable 9 11 Send and Make Break N A Send 9 11 IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address N A None Selected 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 N A Disable 10 5 Ignore Beep N A Disable 10 6 Ignore Bar Code Configuration N A Disable 10 6 Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types N A Symbol OmniLink 11 4 Interface Controller Leading Margin N A 80 msec 11 4 Polarity N A Bar High Margin Low 11 5 Ignore Unknown Characters N A Send 11 5 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 N A Disable 11 6 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII N A Disable 11 6 1User selectio
97. side up A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a bar code You can disable the signature capturing capability in a scanner Signature Boxes Figure G 3 illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes Type 2 rr Type 5 _ Type 7 Type 8 Type 9 Figure G 3 Acceptable Signature Boxes Introduction This appendix defines non parameter attributes Attributes Model Number Attribute 533 Model number of the scanner This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label for example DS6878 HC2000BWR Type S Size Bytes 18 User Mode Access R Values Variable Serial Number Attribute 534 Unique serial number assigned in the manufacturing facility This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label for example M1J26F45V Type S Size Bytes 16 User Mode Access R Values Variable H 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Date of Manufacture Attribute 535 Date of device manufacture assigned in the manufacturing facility This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label for example 30APR14 which reads the 30th of April 2014 Type S Size Bytes 7 User Mode Access R Values Variable Date of First Programming Attribute 614 Date of first electronic programming represents the first time settings where electronically loaded to the scanner either b
98. that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology usually including start stop characters quiet zones data characters and check characters Symbol Aspect Ratio The ratio of symbol height to symbol width Symbol Height The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row Symbol Length Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone margin adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone margin adjacent to a stop character Symbology The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type e g UPC EAN Code 39 PDF417 etc T Tolerance Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width U UPC Universal Product Code A relatively complex numeric symbology Each character consists of two bars and two spaces each of which is any of four widths The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States V Visible Laser Diode VLD A solid state device which produces visible laser light Glossary 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numerics IER e Acca caters E EE Be 13 1 2D bar codes azie anaa a a E E A E E S 15 79 aztec inverse 0 0 0 cee ee eee 15 79 code 128 emulation 15 75 data matrix 15 76 data matrix inverse 005 15 76 MaxicOde 15 77 microPDF417 0 000 eee eee eee 15 74 MICIOOR EEN 15 78 PDFAI aaa na a
99. the Bluetooth Friendly Name Bluetooth Friendly Name Discoverable Mode Select a discoverable mode based on the device initiating discovery e Select General Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a PC e Select Limited Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a mobile device e g Motorola Q and the device does not appear in General Discoverable Mode Note that it can take longer to discover the device in this mode The device remains in Limited Discoverable Mode for 30 seconds and green LEDs flash while in this mode It is then non discoverable To re active Limited Discoverable Mode press the trigger e General Discoverable Mode Limited Discoverable Mode 4 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Wi Fi Friendly Mode Scanners configured for Wi Fi friendly mode behave as follows e The scanner remains in sniff mode and exits sniff mode only during firmware update e f any Wi Fi channel is excluded from the hopping sequence AFH turns off e Scanner and cradle avoid the selected Wi Fi channels after establishing connection e If using this feature configure all scanners in the area for Wi Fi friendly mode e By default no Wi Fi channels are excluded e Since Bluetooth requires a minimum of 20 channels when Wi Fi channels 1 6 and 11 are excluded a smaller number of channels are cut from the hopping sequence e Updating Wi Fi friendly settings before Bluetooth connection is recommended Sc
100. the highest quality image JPEG Quality Value Default 065 5 100 Decimal 6 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a USB host The digital scanner cradle connects directly to a USB host or a powered USB hub The USB host can power the cradle and recharge the digital scanner battery but this charging method has limitations See Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks E Indicates Default North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature Option J NOTE The CR0078 S cradle has the ability to be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply The CR0078 P can only receive power via an external power supply 7 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting a USB Interface J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds Interface Cable USB Series A Connector Figure 7 1 USB Connection The digital scanner cradle connects with USB capable hosts including e Desktop PCs and Notebooks e Apple iM
101. to the host ESD Electro Static Discharge H HID Human Interface Device A Bluetooth host type Host Computer A computer that serves other terminals in a network providing such services as computation database access supervisory programs and network control Hz Hertz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second Glossary 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide IEC International Electrotechnical Commission This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation IEC 825 Class 1 This is the lowest power IEC laser classification Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner s oscillating mirror fails Intercharacter Gap The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code Interleaved 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces Interleaving provides for greater information density The location of wide elements bar spaces within each group determines which characters are encoded This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces Only numeric 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded Interleaved Bar Code A bar code in which characters are paired together using bars to represent the first character and the intervening s
102. transmission After conversion the data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Disable this to transmit UPC E decoded data as UPC E data without conversion Convert UPC E to UPC A Enable 1 Do Not Convert UPC E to UPC A Disable 0 Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Parameter 38 Enable this to convert UPC E1 decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion the data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Disable this to transmit UPC E1 decoded data as UPC E1 data without conversion Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Enable 1 Do Not Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Disable 0 15 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend Parameter 39 Enable this parameter to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN 8 symbols to make them compatible in format to EAN 13 symbols Disable this to transmit EAN 8 symbols as is Enable EAN JAN Zero Extend 1 Disable EAN JAN Zero Extend 0 Bookland ISBN Format Parameter 576 If you enabled Bookland EAN using En
103. using SPP or HID if a disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned check the host device for receipt of transmitted data It is possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost Long low long high beeps Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered See Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 17 Long low long high long low long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device Note In the case of Pairing Methods on page 4 24 the cradle may already be connected to another digital scanner in single Point to Point locked mode or the piconet may be full in Multipoint to Point mode If Pair On Contacts is enabled and the digital scanner that is inserted is already connected to the cradle no beeping occurs 4 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications Host Types To set up the digital scanner for communication with a cradle or to use standard Bluetooth profiles scan the appropriate host type bar code below e Cradle Host default Select this host type for digital scanner s to cradle operation The digital scanner must then be paired to the cradle and the cradle communicates directly to the host via the host interface cable connection e Serial Port Profile Master Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support see page 4 6 The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and
104. 0 msec 5 11 Night Mode Trigger 1215 Disable 5 14 Night Mode Toggle N A N A 5 14 Batch Mode 544 Normal Do Not Batch 5 15 Data User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 3 Table 5 1 User Preferences Default Parameters Continued Parameter e Default Phi hae Hand held Trigger Mode 138 Level 5 17 Hands free Mode 630 Enable 5 18 Presentation Performance Mode 650 Standard 5 19 Low Power Mode 128 Enabled 5 20 Time Delay to Hand held Low Power Mode 146 100 msec 5 20 Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode 663 1 Minute 5 23 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode 662 1 Hour 5 25 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim 729 15 Sec 5 27 Picklist Mode 402 Disabled Always 5 28 Mobile Phone Display Mode 716 Disable 5 29 FIPS Mode 736 Enabled 5 30 PDF Prioritization 719 Disable 5 31 PDF Prioritization Timeout 720 200 msec 5 31 Continuous Bar Code Read 649 Disable 5 32 Unique Bar Code Reporting 723 Disable 5 32 Decode Session Timeout 136 9 9 Sec 5 33 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 137 0 5 Sec 5 33 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 144 0 2 Sec 5 33 Fuzzy 1D Processing 514 Enable 5 34 Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern 306 Enable 5 34 Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern 590 Enable 5 35 Presentation Mode Field of View 609 Full 5 36 Decoding Illumination 298 Enable 5 37 Multicode Mode 677 Disable 5 37 Multicode Expression 661 1 5 3
105. 072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUIJ 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUIN 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUIS 9 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 9 4 Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set Continued GUI Keys Keystrokes 3084 GUIT 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Table 9 5 Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 21 Table 9 5 Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set Continued F Keys Keystroke 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 Table 9 6 Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 6043 6044 undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock 9 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 9 7 Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print S
106. 10 select User Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3 digit prefix Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D 1 Select User Programmable Supplemental 2 to set a second 3 digit prefix Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D 1 User Programmable Supplemental 1 User Programmable Supplemental 2 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy Parameter 80 If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC EAN JAN Supplementals this option adjusts the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission The range is from two to thirty times Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC EAN JAN symbols with and without supplementals The default is 10 Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value Next scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 15 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Parameter 672 Select an output format when reporting UPC EAN JAN bar codes with supplementals with AIM ID enabled e Separate UPC EAN with supplementals transmit as JE lt O or 4 gt lt data gt E lt 1 or 2 gt supp data e Combined EAN 8 with supplementals transmit as JE4 lt data gt E l
107. 10 6 port address 2 20055 10 4 illumination 5 37 6 5 image brightness target white 6 10 image cropping 6 7 image enhancement 6 12 image file format 6 13 6 17 image resolution 6 9 image rotation 0 2 eee eee 6 14 interleaved 20f5 00 a eee eee 15 41 convert to EAN 13 004 15 44 lCAGINS 2 eae d Erde 15 41 inverse ID 15 59 ISBT 128 ashe hod one hee a a a 15 25 ISBT concatenation 15 26 15 27 ISBT concatenation redundancy 15 27 ISSN EAN 2 2 0 2 0000 eee eee 15 22 Japan postal 020000 15 62 JPEG image options 6 10 JPEG quality and size 6 11 JPEG target file size 6 11 keyboard wedge alternate numeric keypad emulation 9 8 caps lock on 9 9 caps lock override 9 9 country keyboard types country codes 9 5 host YPES iiss edad det be Aug d 9 4 ignore unknown characters 9 7 intra keystroke delay 9 8 keystroke delay 9 7 Korean 3ofb ad 15 58 lock override 4 23 low exposure priority for snapshot mode 6 6 low gain priority for snapshot mode 6 6 low power mode 5 20 matrix 2 of 15 55 matrix 2 of 5 check digit 15 57 matrix 2 of 5 lengths 15 56 MAXICOdE AE eee nee eee ceva eies 15 77 microPDF417 00000 ee eee 15 74 MQR a WEE na eed a ae
108. 1021 U NAK 1022 V SYN 1023 w ETB 1024 X CAN 1025 Y EM 1026 Z SUB 1027 A ESC RS 232 Interface 8 19 Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1028 B FS 1029 C GS 1030 D RS 1031 E US 1032 Space Space 1033 IA 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 JD 1037 JE 1038 IF amp 1039 IG f 1040 H 1041 N 1042 IJ R 1043 IK 1044 L 1045 1046 1047 JO 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1057 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 H H 1058 IZ 8 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 29 Encode Character ASCII Character 1059 F 1060 G lt 1061 H 1062 l gt 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 A X 1089 Y Y RS 232 Interface 8 21 Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued ASCII Value Ee EE ASCII Character 1090 Z Z 1091 K 1092 L 1093
109. 13 ETX 1003 Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 Parity Even None Odd Odd Even None Even Hardware RTS CTS None RTS CTS RTS CTS None None None Handshaking Option 3 Option 3 Option 3 Software None None None None ACK NAK None None Handshaking Serial Response 9 9 Sec 2 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec Time out Stop Bit Select One One One One One One One ASCII Format 8 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit Beep On lt BEL gt Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable RTS Line State High Low Low Low No data Low High High to send Prefix None None None None STX 1003 None STX 1002 In the Nixdorf Mode B if CTS is low scanning is disabled When CTS is high scanning is enabled If you scan Nixdorf Mode B without connecting the digital scanner to the proper host it may appear unable to scan If this happens scan a different RS 232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the digital scanner The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning including Set Defaults If you inadvertently select CUTE scan Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 1 on page 5 6 then change the host selection RS 232 Interface 8 5 RS 232 Host Parameters continued Selecting the ICL Fujitsu Wincor Nixdorf Mode A Wincor Nixdorf Mode B OPOS terminal enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 8 3 below These code ID characters are not programmable and are separa
110. 4 R r 1115 S s 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W w 1120 X D 1121 Y y 1122 Z H 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S a 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 7 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 3 USB ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALTL 2077 ALT M 2078 ALTN 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALTR 2083 ALTS 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z USB Interface 7 25 Table 7 4 USB GUI Key Character Set GUI Key Keystroke 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUIA 3066 GUIB 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUI E 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUIJ 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUIN 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q Note GUI Shift Keys The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the rig
111. 6 UPC A ee 15 16 UPC E Preamble ccccccccccec cece eee c eee e cent eee ea ena tate tata saaeaaaaaaaaaaeaaaeeseeesseegeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeees 15 17 UPC E1 Preamble serseriye Ee ENEE SEENEN ENEE EEN EEN EEEa 15 18 Convert UPC E to UPCAA sasidan aa AEEA AAEREN REEE ANEN ERRERA 15 19 Convert UPC E1 to UPC A oo eeccccccccccsccnccccecceceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneess 15 19 EAIN G JAIN G EXte DE EE Ee 15 20 Bookland ISBN Format ccccccccecceeeeeeee eee e eee et cette eee eae ea ee cae eae aaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseseeeseeeeeeseenteees 15 20 UCC Coupon Extended Code c ccc cceccee cece cece cece eee e ete ee eee tees seeaeaaaeaaeeeaeeaeaeeaeeaseeasaeeeeaeeea 15 21 COUPON Report 0 2 22 cccccccccceccccecceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetiniinies 15 22 ISSN EAN Age 15 22 Gode EEN 15 23 Enable Disable Code 128 15 23 Set Lengths for Code E 15 23 Enable Disable GS1 128 formerly UCCIEAN 12801 15 25 Enable Disable ISBT In 15 25 ISBT Concatenation EE 15 26 Check ISB I E EE 15 27 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy EE 15 27 Code eet 15 28 Enable Disable Code 209 15 28 Enable Disable Trioptic Code 20 15 28 Convert Code 39 to Code 37 15 29 Code 32 Prefix E 15 29 Set Lengths for Code JQ sursin aaa AA Ra Ena 15 30 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Zzengu geed GEESS REESEN gege 15 31 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit egeeteggeggeE Eed 15 31 Code 39
112. 7 227 Disable 15 74 Code 128 Emulation 123 Disable 15 75 Data Matrix 292 Enable 15 76 Data Matrix Inverse 588 15 76 Non Healthcare Configurations Regular Healthcare Configurations Inverse Autodetect Maxicode 294 Disable 15 77 QR Code 293 Enable 15 77 QR Inverse 587 Regular 15 78 MicroQR 573 Enable 15 78 Aztec 574 Enable 15 79 Aztec Inverse 589 Regular 15 79 Symbology Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 78 1 15 80 Security Level 77 1 15 82 Intercharacter Gap Size 381 Normal 15 83 Report Version Report Software Version N A N A 15 83 Macro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer N A N A 15 84 Abort Macro PDF Entry N A N A 15 84 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Symbol Code Identifiers Table B 41 Symbol Code Characters UPC A UPC E UPC E1 EAN 8 EAN 13 Code 39 Code 32 Codabar Code 128 ISBT 128 ISBT 128 Concatenated Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA Code 11 MSI GS1 128 Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 39 Coupon Code GS1 DataBar Family Matrix 2 of 5 UCC Composite TLC 39 Cc Al oj D Z Z Tr A SC Clou 71 m CO o BD gt Chinese 2 of 5 B 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table Bi Symbol Code Characters Continued Code Character Code Type V Korean 3 of 5 X ISSN EAN PDF417 Macro PDF417
113. 7 6 6 13 mil 100 UPC 1 2 14 2 5 mil PDF 2 0 4 5 6 6 mil PDF 1 2 6 0 10 mil Data Matrix 1 1 7 2 Table 2 7 DS6878 HD Decode Ranges Symbol Density Bar Code Type Typical Working Ranges Far 3 mil Code 39 0 6 3 4 5 mil Code 39 FOV 4 9 13 mil 100 UPC 1 2 6 8 4 mil PDF 0 9 2 8 10 mil Data Matrix 0 6 4 2 a Field of View Introduction This chapter provides suggested digital scanner and cradle maintenance troubleshooting technical specifications and signal descriptions pinouts Maintenance Digital Scanner Cleaning the exit window is required A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy e Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window e Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth e Wipe the scanner window using a tissue moistened with an approved cleanser listed below e Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window The DS6878 HC design allows safe cleansing of the product plastics with a variety of cleaning products and disinfectants If required wipe the digital scanner with the following list of approved cleansers e Isopropyl alcohol e Bleach sodium hypochlorite e Hydrogen peroxide e Gentle dish soap and water IMPORTANT Cleansers that contain active ingredients not listed above should not be utilized on the A DS6878 HC digital scanner 3 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner Cradle Do not pour spray or spill any l
114. 78 HC2FO9BWR DS6878 DL20001WR DS6878 DL20007WR DS6878 HD20007WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range cash register white DS6878 digital scanner standard range twilight black DS6878 digital scanner standard range FIPS cash register white DS6878 digital scanner standard range FIPS twilight black DS6878 digital scanner standard range healthcare white DS6878 digital scanner standard range FIPS healthcare white DS6878 digital scanner standard range DL parsing cash register white DS6878 digital scanner standard range DL parsing twilight black DS6878 digital scanner high density twilight black xviii DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter Descriptions Topics covered in this guide are as follows Chapter 1 Getting Started provides a product overview unpacking instructions and cable connection information Chapter 2 Scanning describes parts of the digital scanner beeper and LED definitions and how to use the digital scanner Chapter 3 Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the digital scanner and cradle troubleshooting and technical specifications Chapter 4 Radio Communications provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication This chapter also includes programming bar codes to configure the digital scanner Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options provides p
115. 8 Multicode Mode Concatenation 717 Disable 5 43 Multicode Concatenation Symbology 722 Concatenate as PDF417 5 44 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character 45 None 5 47 Prefix Value 99 105 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 48 5 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 5 1 User Preferences Default Parameters Continued Parameter Ha a Default el bl Suffix 1 Value 98 104 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 48 Suffix 2 Value 100 106 Scan Data Transmission Format 235 Data as is 5 49 FN1 Substitution Values 103 109 Set 5 50 Transmit No Read Message 94 Disable 5 51 Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval 1118 Disable 5 52 Dump Scanner Parameters 5 53 Report Version 5 53 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 5 User Preferences Default Parameters The scanner can be reset to two types of defaults factory defaults or custom defaults Scan the appropriate bar code below to reset the scanner to its default settings and or set the scanner s current settings as the custom default e Restore Defaults Resets all default parameters as follows e If custom default values were configured see Write to Custom Defaults the custom default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned e If no custom default values were configured the factory default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is s
116. 9 bar code without a leading space or scan Do Not Buffer Code 39 on Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store on page 15 32 to transmit stored Code 29 data Digital Scanner emits four high beeps on trigger release Low battery Place digital scanner in cradle to charge the battery 3 0 3 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3 1 Problem Digital Scanner emits four long low beeps Troubleshooting Continued Possible Causes A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored Possible Solutions This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting The digital scanner is either Out of range Not paired to the cradle Not connected to a remote Bluetooth device Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device Or Scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle Acknowledgment that transmitted data was not received by the cradle Data may have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Digital Scanner emits five low long beeps Conversion or format error Check ADF rules for the host Decoding Bar Codes Digital Scanner emits the laser but does not decode the bar code Digital Scanner is not programmed for the correct bar code type Program the digital scanner to read that type of bar code See Chapter 15 Sym
117. AN AN quads Ole EN SEN ege C 1 Index 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide scanner emulation defaults 12 3 scanner Darts 1 3 scanner to cradle support 4 21 SCANNING EE 2 5 BOES e Se d 5 2 6 2 7 11 9 7 15 2 radio communications sequence example 4 1 sequence example 5 2 6 2 15 1 scanning LED 2205 4 0 eyes eed eae dee ad bathe 2 3 secure simple pairing IO capability 4 32 serial port profile 4 6 MASTER 2 cee hs de eked AEN edad 4 4 4 17 4 22 SIAVE aiiai EE ee ia e ec dls 4 4 service information XX setup connecting a USB interface 7 2 connecting an RS 232 interface 8 2 connecting keyboard wedge interface 9 2 connecting to an IBM 468X 469X host 10 2 connecting using wand emulation 11 2 12 2 cradle ieaiaia NEIE ie A 1 7 inserting scanner in cradle 1 12 installing the cable 1 8 1 9 mounting rale 1 10 GE EE 1 7 supplying power 5 1 9 1 10 unpacking 1 2 signal descriptions 3 12 signature Capture 6 16 bits per pixel 000202 ee eaee 6 18 file format selector 2 0 4 6 17 height cain ZZ AEE ee ae Pee ees 6 19 JPEG quality 6 19 Vleit EEN 6 19 slave eal dione awe A ayes AES 3 5 4 4 4 6 snapshot mode timeout 00 00 ee 6 7 specifications 3 9 SPP AER RE EE ES
118. B device type J NOTE When changing USB Device Types the cradle automatically restarts The digital scanner issues a disconnect reconnect beep sequence J NOTE Select IBM hand held USB to disable data transmission when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command Aim illumination and decoding is still permitted Select IBM OPOS IBM Hand held USB with Full Scan Disable to completely shut off the scanner when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command including aim illumination decoding and data transmission J NOTE The SSI over USB CDC option enables a subset of the SSI protocol over the USB CDC interface which omits all hardware handshaking functionality For more information refer to the SS Programmer s Guide USB Keyboard HID IBM Table Top USB IBM Hand held USB IBM OPOS IBM Hand held USB with Full Scan Disable 7 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Device Type continued Simple COM Port Emulation USB CDC Host SSI over USB CDC Symbol Native API SNAPI with Imaging Interface Symbol Native API SNAPI without Imaging Interface USB Interface Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking Afte
119. Bits per Pixel BPP 314 8 BPP 6 18 Signature Capture Width 366 400 6 19 Signature Capture Height 367 100 6 19 Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421 65 6 19 6 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Imaging Preferences The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics Image capture occurs in all modes of operation including decode and snapshot Operational Modes The digital scanner has two modes of operation e Decode Mode e Snapshot Mode Decode Mode By default when you pull the trigger the digital scanner attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes within its field of view The digital scanner remains in this mode until it decodes a bar code or you release the trigger Snapshot Mode Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host To temporarily enter this mode scan the Snapshot Mode bar code While in this mode the digital scanner blinks the green LED at 1 second intervals to indicate it is not in standard operating decode mode In Snapshot Mode the digital scanner turns on its laser aiming pattern to highlight the area to capture in the image The next trigger pull instructs the digital scanner to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host A short time may pass less than 2 seconds between when the trigger is pulled and the image is captured as the digital scanner adjusts to the lighting conditions Hold the digital scanner steady until the image i
120. CII character value to the pair For example when Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled and a B is scanned it is interpreted as b J as and V as Scanning ABC l outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC gt Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1001 A CTRL A 1002 B CTRL B 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRL E 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRL G 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE1 1009 i CTRL I HORIZONTAL TAB 1010 J CTRLJ 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRL L 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRL N 1015 O CTRL O 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRL Q 1018 R CTRLR 1019 S CTRLS 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U CTRL U 1022 V CTRL V 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 9 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII CL Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1023 W CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL Esc 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 IA 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 IF amp 1039 IG i 1040 H 1041 N 1042 IJ S 1043 IK 1044 L 1045 1046 1047 JO 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 The keystroke in
121. CR B 1 Disable OCR B 0 14 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR B Variant Parameter 685 OCR B has the following variants Selecting the most appropriate font variant affects performance and accuracy OCR B Full ASCII 1 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ N OCR B Banking 0123456789 lt gt JNP OCR B Limited 0123456789 lt gt ACENPSTVX OCR B ISBN 10 Digit Book Numbers 0123456789 gt BCEINPSXz OCR B ISBN 10 or 13 Digit Book Numbers 0123456789 gt BCEINPSXz OCR B Travel Document Version 1 TD1 3 Line ID Cards 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ OCR B Travel Document Version 2 TD2 2 Line ID Cards 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ OCR B Travel Document 2 or 3 Line ID Cards Auto Detect 1 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ N OCR B Passport 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZN OCR B Visa Type A 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ OCR B Visa Type B 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZN To choose a variant scan one of the following bar codes Selecting the following OCR B variants automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines on page 14 12 These five variants invoke extensive special algorithms and checking for that particular document type Variant OCR Lines Setting Passport 2 TD1 ID Cards 3 TD2 ID Cards 2 Visa Type A 2 Visa Type B 2 Selecting one of th
122. Code 39 Option Value Option No check character or Full ASCII processing Reader has checked one check character Reader has checked and stripped check character Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion o Bl Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character N Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character Example A Full ASCII bar code with check character W A I MI DW is transmitted as JA7AIMID where 7 3 4 Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as X0412356 Code 128 0 Standard data packet no Function code 1 in first symbol position 1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position 2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position Example A Code EAN 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position AIMID is transmitted as C1AIMID 12 of 5 0 No check digit processing 1 Reader has validated check digit 3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit Example An 2 of 5 bar code without check digit 4123 is transmitted as l04123 Codabar 0 No check digit processing 1 Reader has checked check digit 3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission Example A Codabar bar code without check digit 4123
123. Code 39 Check Digit Enable 1 Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 0 S NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function 15 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Parameter 17 Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 39 Full ASCII 1 Disable Code 39 Full ASCII 0 J NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host dependent and is therefore described in the ASCII Character Set Table for the appropriate interface See the ASCII Character Set for USB on page 7 19 or the ASCII Character Set for RS 232 on page 8 18 Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store Parameter 113 This feature allows the digital scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols Selecting the Scan and Store option Buffer Code 39 temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading space as a first character for later transmission The leading space is not buffered Decoding a Code 39 symbol with no leading space transmits in sequence all buffered data in a first in first out format plus the triggering symbol See the followi
124. DEE 17 18 Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters cccceeeeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 20 Parsing RIS age 17 39 Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example ccscseeeeeeceeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeseeneneeneeee 17 43 Appendix A Standard Default Parameters Appendix B Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers ciccvssseicsericrasdsicasieccddepeaa vee cetecenteeeedeau son nntnerhucedad che deecentunde pacuebdavebanreenslocedtaveds B 1 ee B 3 Appendix C Sample Bar Codes Code EE C 1 RT MEN C 1 UPA By EE EE C 1 EAN 133 100 EE C 2 EE ane eer eee ee oe OE em ae BR PE Tae ee ce eege C 2 ug E E EE C 2 GoT RE EE C 3 GS REES C 4 PDD RAAT EE C 4 Data ue EE C 4 EK ee le EE C 5 UE C 5 WS POSING ge eebe ek eeh ege ee ee C 5 UK Ce EE C 5 Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes Numeric Bar gen TEE D 1 Cancel TEE D 3 Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes e ie Me Keyboard E E 1 Appendix F ASCII Character Sets Appendix G Signature Capture Code MINEO GUI CUOND WE G 1 Solo Te De TICE G 1 Signature Capture Area eieiei G 1 CapCode Pattern Structure ccccccccccssssssccececeeceeaeseeeseceeeeseseeeeeeseceeeeeesseseeesaeeeceseesesaesaaanssess G 2 xvi DS6878 Product Reference Guide Start Stop Ee EE G 2 Rita EE G 3 Data Hee G 3 Additional Capabilities ssirisaissi remcd aaa iiaeiai iiaiai G 4 Signature EE G 4 Appendix H Non Parameter Attributes INtrOCUCTION MEIE ET H 1 Edel H 1 Model
125. DS6878 DS6878 PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 72E 131700 05 Revision A August 2014 ii DS6878 Product Reference Guide 2011 2014 Motorola Solutions Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Motorola This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Motorola grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Motorola No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Motorola The user agrees to maintain Motorola s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to include the same on any authorized copies
126. DS6878 Product Reference Guide KE ge iii Revision e UO Saccatearacxocausoaptinnian saitess ia Akandi iaaaaTa i LinaN Na kaaria URAR sinia iv About This Guide Piri Coe Yo 6 Ce asn na E E E ee PN xvii OMIT ANON EE xvii Chapter Descriptions ccccccccccecccecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeettigenenienes xviii Notational Copnventions nn nnen n AEEA AERA AARARERARE RARE RE REEERE REE EE RAA EE EAEan xix Related Docume ntSi 2 2203 ee AE Ge eet iii eis eerie ee eects XX DEVICE INTOFMAULION EE XX Chapter 1 Getting Started e wee en EE 1 1 Ire ciiisean yorasi E aANT ANEN EEE NEE AEEA RENEE ETKA Roen 1 2 Unpacking the Digital Scanner and Cradle ccccccceeeeeeeeeeseceeeneeeeneeeseneneeeeeeeeseeneseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Pans geed a E a 1 3 Scanno aaa EE 1 3 E EE Tee EE 1 4 CR0078 P Seres Cradle eebe EEN 1 6 Digital Scanner Cradle voce ccarscguess seactectarsytiasstancadeen desnnotenencegenutay atobeadedvudecnagorcncenieataseaceaenacatecuee 1 7 Connecting the CR0078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle cccccecceseceeeccneeeaeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 8 Supplying Power to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle eee eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee eee eeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeea 1 9 Connecting the CROO78 P Series Cradle cccc cccnecceeeceseeceeneeeeeeeeenseneeneeeeeeeeenenseeeneneeteeeens 1 9 Supplying Power to the CR0078 P Cradle cc tccsissiicterebendteresadestecntadsansedanneie
127. Driver s Licence Parse Rule 17 44 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Then in order to limit the full name to 15 characters create the following ADF rule 1 Begin New Rule 2 Criterion Parsed Driver s License 3 Action Send Next 15 Characters 4 Save Rule For a license belonging to Michael Williams the parsed data is Williams Michael and Williams Micha after applying the previous ADF rule Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Radio Communications Radio Communications Host Type N A Cradle Host Discoverable Mode N A General Wi Fi Friendly Mode N A Disable Wi Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion N A Use All Channels Apple iOS HID Feature N A Disable Android HID Feature N A Disable Country Keyboard Types Country Code N A North American HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay N A No Delay 0 msec CAPS Lock Override N A Disable Ignore Unknown Characters N A Enable Emulate Keypad N A Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution N A Disable Function Key Mapping N A Disable Simulated Caps Lock N A Disable Convert Case N A No Case Conversion Beep on Reconnect Attempt N A Disable Reconnect Attempt Interval N A 30 sec A 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continu
128. Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 1 Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 0 Symbologies 15 71 Composite Composite CC C Parameter 341 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC C Enable CC C 1 Disable CC C 0 J NOTE For HC configurations the default is Enable CC C Composite CC A B Parameter 342 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC A B Enable CC A B 1 Disable CC A B 0 af NOTE For HC configurations the default is Enable CC A B 15 72 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Composite TLC 39 Parameter 371 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC 39 Enable TLC39 1 Disable TLC39 0 UPC Composite Mode Parameter 344 Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol e Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected e Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion If 2D is not present the UPC bar code does not tran
129. GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUI S 3084 GUIT 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key ASCII Character Sets F 9 Table F 5 PF Key Standard Default Table PF Keys Keystroke 4001 PF 1 4002 PF 2 4003 PF 3 4004 PF 4 4005 PF 5 4006 PF 6 4007 PF 7 4008 PF 8 4009 PF 9 4010 PF 10 4011 PF 11 4012 PF 12 4013 PF 13 4014 PF 14 4015 PF 15 4016 PF 16 Table t F key Standard Default Table F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F 10 5011 F 11 F 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table t F key Standard Default Table Continued F Keys Keystroke 5012 F 12 5013 F13 5014 F 14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F 19 5020 F 20 5021 F 21 5022 F 22 5023 F 23 5024 F 24 Table F 7 Numeric Key Standard Default Table Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 j 6043 6044 Undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 ASCII Character Sets F 11 Table F 7 Numeric Key S
130. Interpretation All data characters 92 are doubled 2 Reader set for Basic Channel operation no escape character transmission protocol Data characters 92 are not doubled Note When decoders are set to this mode unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted 3 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 4 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is in the range 908 909 5 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is in the range 910 911 Example A PDF417 bar code ABCD with no transmission protocol enabled is transmitted as JL2ZABCD Data Matrix 0 ECC 000 140 not supported 1 ECC 200 2 ECC 200 FNC 1 in first or fifth position 3 ECC 200 FNC1 in second or sixth position 4 ECC 200 ECI protocol implemented 5 ECC 200 FNC1 in first or fifth position ECI protocol implemented 6 ECC 200 FNC1 in second or sixth position ECI protocol implemented MaxiCode 0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5 1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3 2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5 ECI protocol implemented 3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3 ECI protocol implemented in secondary message Standard Default Parameters B 7 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type Option Value Option QR Code 0 Model 1 symbol 1 Model 2 MicroQR symbol
131. JPEG target file etze 6 11 image resolution 6 9 imaging preferences parameters 6 2 inserting battery 1 11 interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes check digit verification 15 43 convert to EAN 23 15 44 transmit check dont 15 43 J JPEG image options 6 10 size quality 0 2 eee eee 6 11 target file setze 6 11 K keyboard wedge connection 9 2 keyboard wedge defaults 000 9 3 keyboard wedge parameters 2 4 9 4 Korean 3 of 5barcodes 15 58 L LED battery reconditioning definitions 1 16 Charging 1 16 2 3 discharging 1 16 SCANNING ee rie ce eee bee bea ee eda eet 2 3 standard definitions 00 2 3 lock override 4 23 locked pairing mode 4 23 4 26 low power mode 02000e eee aes 4 17 M macro PDF ANNE ENN NEEN NEEN eee 15 84 flush buffer abort PDF entry 15 84 maintenance 3 1 battery viscee evan EE EE Ee 3 4 digital scanner master 000 3 5 4 4 4 6 4 17 4 22 matrix 2 of 5 barcodes 15 55 Check digit eee ce NN eee eae ene 15 57 leng se edie de Ee EE hdd wade 15 56 transmit check digit 15 57 maxicode barcodes 15 77 microPDF417 bar codes nannaa aaan 15 74 Motorola Solutions support XX mounting cradle aile oe A 1 10 MSI bar codes check digit algorithm 15 54 check digits 0 e eee ee
132. Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Down Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an RS 232 host interface The RS 232 interface is used to attach the scanner cradle to point of sale devices host computers or other devices with an available RS 232 port i e COM port If the particular host is not listed in set the communication parameters to match the host device Refer to the documentation for the host device J NOTE This digital scanner uses TTL RS 232 signal levels which interface with most system architectures For system architectures requiring RS 232C signal levels Motorola offers different cables providing the TTL to RS 232C conversion Contact Motorola Solutions Support for more information Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks Indicates Default_ Baud Rate 9 600 Feature Option 8 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting an RS 232 Interface See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless V communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low
133. Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 17 Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued ee Code 39 neat Charecter Keystroke 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S s 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W W 1120 X D 1121 Y y 1122 Z H 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S e 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 9 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 9 3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALTL 2077 ALT M 2078 ALTN 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALTR 2083 ALTS 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 19 Table 9 4 Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set GUI Keys Keystrokes 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUIA 3066 GUIB 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUI E 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3
134. Micro PDF417 H Aztec Aztec Rune POO Data Matrix P01 QR Code MicroQR P02 Maxicode P03 US Postnet P04 US Planet P05 Japan Postal P06 UK Postal P08 Netherlands KIX Code PO9 Australia Post POA USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail POB UPU FICS Postal POX Signature Capture Standard Default Parameters ER AIM Code Identifiers Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three character string lem where Flag Character ASCII 93 Code Character see Table B 2 Modifier Character see Table B 3 c m Table B 2 Aim Code Characters Code Character Code Type A Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Code 32 Code 128 ISBT 128 ISBT 128 Concatenated GS1 128 Coupon Code 128 portion Data Matrix mlo UPC EAN Coupon UPC portion GS1 DataBar Family Codabar Code 93 IlOI m1 o Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 m PDF417 Macro PDF417 Micro PDF417 L2 TLC 39 MSI QR Code MicroQR Discrete 2 of 5 IATA 2 of 5 c ojoj Maxicode E Aztec Aztec Rune Ee Bookland EAN ISSN EAN Trioptic Code 39 Chinese 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 US Postnet US Planet UK Postal Japan Postal Australia Post Netherlands KIX Code USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail UPU FICS Postal Signature Capture B 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B 3 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Code Type
135. Modes of Operation e Normal default Do not batch data The digital scanner attempts to transmit every scanned bar code e Out of Range Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when it loses its connection to a remote device for example when a user holding the digital scanner walks out of range Data transmission is triggered by reestablishing the connection with the remote device for example when a user holding the digital scanner walks back into range e Standard Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar code data after Enter Batch Mode is scanned Data transmission is triggered by scanning Send Batch Data J NOTE Transmission is halted if the connection to the remote device is lost e Cradle Contact Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when Enter Batch Mode is scanned Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the digital scanner into the cradle J NOTE f the digital scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer transmission halts until the digital scanner is re inserted in the cradle In all modes transmissions are halted if the digital scanner is moved out of range The digital scanner resumes when it is back in range If a bar code is scanned while batch data is transmitted it is appended to the end of the batched data parameter bar codes are not stored 5 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Batch Mode continued Normal 0 Standard Batc
136. OCR Template as 99999XAAAAA to decode OCR strings of either 12345 or ABCDE Up to 99 templates are permitted Template Examples Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition Field Definition Description M 99977 M followed by three digits and two optional digits X 997777 X X followed by two digits four optional digits and an X 9959775599 Two digits followed by any character a digit two optional digits any two characters and two digits A55 999 99 A letter followed by two characters a dash three digits a dash and two digits 33A 99 Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter a period and two digits 999992991 Five digits followed by an optional alpha two digits and an optional alphanumeric PN98 Literal field PN98 OCR Check Digit Modulus Parameter 688 This option sets OCR module check digit calculation The check digit is the last digit in the right most position in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the collected data The check digit is the end product of a calculation made on the incoming data For check digit calculation for example Modulus 10 alpha and numeric characters are assigned numeric weights see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The calculation is applied to the character weights and the resulting check digit is added to the end of the data If the incoming data does not match the check digit the data is considered corrupt The se
137. Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 128 continued Code 128 One Discrete Length Code 128 Two Discrete Lengths Code 128 Length Within Range Code 128 Any Length Symbologies 15 25 Enable Disable GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 Parameter 14 To enable or disable GS1 128 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable GS1 128 1 Disable GS1 128 0 Enable Disable ISBT 128 Parameter 84 ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry Scan a bar code below to enable or disable ISBT 128 If necessary the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data Enable ISBT 128 1 Disable ISBT 128 0 15 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide ISBT Concatenation Parameter 577 Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types e If you select Disable ISBT Concatenation the digital scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters e If you select Enable ISBT Concatenation there must be two ISBT codes in order for the digital scanner to decode and perform concatenation The digital scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols e If you select Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation the digital scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes immediately If only a single ISBT symbol is present the digital scanner must decode the s
138. R Subset from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting Then scan End of Message in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting OCR Subset To cancel an OCR subset for OCR A or OCR B scan OCR A variant Full ASCII or OCR B variant Full ASCII For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that character set or scan an option from the Default Parameters on page 5 5 and re program the digital scanner OCR Quiet Zone Parameter 695 This option sets the OCR quiet zone The digital scanner stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide blank space The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option Used with parsers that tolerate slanted characters the End of Field count is roughly a count of 8 for a character width For example if set to 15 then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser Larger end of field numbers require bigger quiet zones at each end of text line To set a quiet zone scan the following bar code then scan a two digit number using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting The range of the quiet zone is 20 99 and the default is 50 indicating a six character width quiet zone OCR Quiet Zone OCR Programming 14 15 OCR Bright Illumination Parameter 701 When enabled image contrast is improved for OCR scan
139. Reference Guide p n 72 138860 xx provides general information regarding the cradle It includes set up and usage instructions The latest version of this guide and all guides are available at www motorolasolutions com support Service Information If you have a problem using the equipment contact your facility s technical or systems support If there is a problem with the equipment they will contact the Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center at at www motorolasolutions com support When contacting Motorola Solutions support please have the following information available e Serial number of the unit e Model number or product name e Software type and version number Motorola responds to calls by e mail telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in service agreements If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Solutions support you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions Motorola is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty If you purchased your business product from a Motorola business partner please contact that business partner for support Introduction The DS6878 combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional bar code scanning performance and advanced ergonomics in a light weight design The digital scanner ensures comfort and ease of u
140. Rubber Foot Host Cable Hook Power Cable Groove Desk Wall Mount Converter Knob Rubber Foot Mounting Hole Figure 1 4 CR0078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle Back View 1 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide CRO0078 P Series Cradle Latch Charging Communication Contacts Page Button LED Figure 1 5 CR0078 P Cradle Front View Power Cable Groove Host Cable Groove Rubber Foot Rubber Foot Host Cable Groove Power Cable Groove Cable Support Hook Power Port Cable Support Hook Mounting Hole Host Port Mounting Hole Rubber Foot Rubber Foot Figure 1 6 CR0078 P Cradle Back View Getting Started 1 7 Digital Scanner Cradle The digital scanner cradles CRO078 S and CR0078 P serve as a stand charger and host interface for the digital scanner The cradle sits on a desktop The CRO078 S cradle can also be mounted on a vertical surface such as a wall For more information about mounting options and procedures refer to the documentation included with the cradle The CRO0078 S cradle is available as a charging cradle with a radio and as a charge only cradle The CRO0078 P cradle is only available as a charging cradle with a radio The differences between the two versions are as follows e Charging cradle with radio When the cordless digital scanner is paired to the cradle all communication between the digital scanner and the host computer is accomplished through the cradle Each bar code
141. To select the duration for the beeper scan one of the following bar codes Short 0 A Medium 1 Long 2 Beep on Insertion Parameter 288 When a digital scanner is inserted into a cradle and detects power it emits a short low beep This feature is enabled by default To enable or disable beeping on insertion scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Beep on Insertion 1 Disable Beep on Insertion 0 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 11 Decode Pager Motor Parameter 613 For DS6878 HC units only manufactured after xx xx 2013 The scanner includes a pager motor which when enabled vibrates the scanner for a period of time when a successful decode occurs Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the pager motor If enabled scan the appropriate bar code to set the period of time in which to vibrate the scanner see Decode Pager Motor Duration below Pager Motor Disable 0 Pager Motor Enable 1 Decode Pager Motor Duration Parameter 626 150 msec 15 200 msec 20 5 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode Pager Motor Duration continued
142. Transmit MSI Check Digit S EE 15 53 MSI Check Digit AlgornthM EE 15 54 TEE Ee AEE AE AT ee eech 15 54 Eleng ee ee 15 54 O Lake E 15 55 Enable Disable Matrix 2 of 5 ee 15 55 Set Lengths for Matrix 2 OTD wien cdctensusiatattcodanns gereest 15 56 Matrix 2 of 5 Check e VE 15 57 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit egene hetten ee 15 57 all E OFS ER 15 58 Enable Disable Korean 3 of EE 15 58 Inverse 1D sisvcisssaasssncssctcsduavalsebaadaysconsdcasissheaauceuenawedaneauentdwevedhauessavvanasi onstuanuveteasevaatecenssyviauees eaves 15 59 FostalCodesS ean itera esas E E da den ee eege 15 60 US POSE EE 15 60 EE ee 15 60 Transmit US Postal Check KE 15 61 le 15 61 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit EE 15 62 Japan Postal piirsi satus a E aE a aa EE E EA E EER 15 62 Australa POSi EE 15 63 Australia Post Format cccccecccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeseseeseeeseenseeecueeeees 15 64 Netherlands KIX Code ne 15 65 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail eEEERRREEEEREEEEEEEEEEERREEEEEEEEEREERRREEEEEEEEREEEERREEEEEEENEE NEEN 15 65 xiv DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPU FICS e 15 66 GSI RE EISE 15 67 ENKE TEEN TE 15 67 GS1 DataBar Limited 2 0 2 0 cccccccce ra nets need ee ee tent eed eeteeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeenien 15 67 GS1 DataBar Expanded 0 ccccccccccccceccceccceeecececeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenteess 15 68 Go DataBar Limited Security Level EE 15 69 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC
143. a single field with the entire name In addition some IDs may expire on the subject s birth date and the actual expiration date field may only indicate the year In order to present data in a consistent format the following nine bar codes return data that may be calculated from the actual data contained within the ID bar code First Name Middle NamelInitial L ast Name Name Suffix Name Prefix Expiration Date Birth Date 17 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes continued Issue Date ID Number Formatted Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 7 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes TLL AAMVA Issuer ID KAA UMM Full Name PUTNAM Last Name DUU First Name INIA Middle Name Initial WU MICU Name Suffix TT Name Prefix 17 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address Line 2 Mailing Address City Mailing Address State Mailing Address Postal Code Home Address Line 1 Home Address Line 2 Drivers License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 9 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Home Address City Home Address State Home Address Postal Code License ID Number License Class License Restrict
144. able 15 43 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 82 Disable 15 44 Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Discrete 2 of 5 5 Disable 15 44 Set Length s for D 2 of 5 20 21 12 15 45 Codabar NW 7 Codabar 7 Disable 15 47 Set Lengths for Codabar 24 25 5 to 55 15 47 CLSI Editing 54 Disable 15 49 NOTIS Editing 55 Disable 15 49 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters 855 Upper Case 15 50 Transmission MSI MSI 11 Disable 15 51 Set Length s for MSI 30 31 4 to 55 15 51 MSI Check Digits 50 One 15 53 Transmit MSI Check Digit 46 Disable 15 53 MSI Check Digit Algorithm 51 Mod 10 Mod 10 15 54 Chinese 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 408 Disable 15 54 Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 618 Disable 15 55 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 619 620 1 Length 14 15 56 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 622 Disable 15 57 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623 Disable 15 57 Symbologies 15 5 Table 15 41 Symbologies Default Parameters Continued Parameter sea Default tite ee Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 581 Disable 15 58 Inverse 1D Inverse 1D 586 Regular 15 59 Postal Codes US Postnet 89 Disable 15 60 US Planet 90 Disable 15 60 Transmit US Postal Check Digit 95 Enable 15 61 UK Postal 91 Disable 15 61 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 96 Enable 15 62 Japan Postal 290 Disable 15 62 Australia Post 291 Disable 15 63 Australia Post Format 718 Autodiscriminate 15 64 Netherlands KIX Code 326 Di
145. able Disable Bookland EAN on page 15 9 select one of the following formats for Bookland data Bookland ISBN 10 The digital scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10 digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward compatibility Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode Bookland ISBN 13 The digital scanner reports Bookland data starting with either 978 or 979 as EAN 13 in 13 digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN 13 protocol Bookland ISBN 10 0 Bookland ISBN 13 1 J NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly first enable Bookland EAN using Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 15 9 then select either Decode UPC EAN Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals or Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 15 10 Symbologies 15 21 UCC Coupon Extended Code Parameter 85 Enable this parameter to decode UPC A bar codes starting with digit 5 EAN 13 bar codes starting with digit 99 and UPC A GS1 128 Coupon Codes UPCA EAN 13 and GS1 128 must be enabled to scan all types of Coupon Codes Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code 1 Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code 0 I NOTE See UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 15 13 to control autodiscrimination of the GS1 128 right half of a coupon
146. ac G4 iBooks North America only e IBM SurePOS terminals e Sun IBM and other network computers that support more than one keyboard The following operating systems support the digital scanner cradle through USB e Windows 98 2000 ME XP e MacOS 8 5 and above e IBM 4690 OS The digital scanner cradle also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices HID USB Interface 7 3 To connect the USB interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the CRO078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle on page 1 8 or Connecting the CR0078 P Series Cradle on page 1 9 2 Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal 3 Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 7 5 4 On first installation when using Windows the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver To install this driver provided by Windows click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice The cradle powers up during this installation 5 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 7 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than
147. affected Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer If you scan the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty e A short low high low beep signals that the buffer is empty e No transmission occurs e The buffer remains empty Symbologies 15 35 Code 93 Enable Disable Code 93 Parameter 9 To enable or disable Code 93 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 93 1 Disable Code 93 0 Set Lengths for Code 93 Parameter L1 26 L2 27 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 93 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 93 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 93 Two Discrete Length
148. aking takes precedence J NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state RS 232 Interface 8 11 Hardware Handshaking continued e None Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired e Standard RTS CTS Scan the bar code below to select Standard RTS CTS Hardware Handshaking e RTS CTS Option 1 When RTS CTS Option 1 is selected the digital scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS The digital scanner de asserts RTS when the transmission is complete e RTS CTS Option 2 When Option 2 is selected RTS is always high or low user programmed logic level However the digital scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response Time out the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data e RTS CTS Option 3 When Option 3 is selected the digital scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission regardless of the state of CTS The digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for CTS to be asserted If CTS is not asserted during this time the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The digital scanner de asserts RTS when transmission is complete None Standard RTS CTS RTS CTS Option 1 RTS CTS Option 2
149. aler com Wholesaler il dl lll Die 800 321 4405 x2 We know ID It s what we do 72E 131700 05 Revision A August 2014 500
150. althcare White Performance Characteristics Light Source Aiming Pattern 650 nm laser diode Illumination 630 nm LED Frame Rate Decode Mode Up to 60 fps Radio Range Minimum 33 ft 10m Typical warehouse environment 50 ft 15m Battery Specifications Roll Tolerance Pitch Tolerance Yaw Tolerance Nominal Working Distance Decode Capability 750mAH NiMH 3 AAA number of scans per full charge typically 15 000 1 scan second Charge Time Fully discharged battery lt 3 hours via external power approximately 5 5 hours via host power through cable 360 60 60 See Decode Ranges on page 2 8 UPC EAN and with supplementals Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Trioptic Code 39 GS1 DataBar Variants GS1 128 Code 128 Code 128 Full ASCII Code 93 Codabar NW71 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 MSI Codell IATA Bookland EAN Code 32 Interfaces Supported See Table 3 3 User Environment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Charging Temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Drop Specifications Withstands multiple 6 ft 1 8 m drops to concrete at room temperature Withstands multiple 5 ft 1 5m drops to concrete at 0 to 50 C of Cradle Insertions 250 000 insertions 3 9
151. an a bar code below to enable or disable Wi Fi Friendly Mode then see Wi Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion to select any channels to exclude Disable Wi Fi Friendly Mode Enable Wi Fi Friendly Mode Wi Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion Select the channels to exclude e Exclude Wi Fi channel 1 Bluetooth channels 0 21 are excluded from hopping sequence 2402 2423 MHz e Exclude Wi Fi channel 6 Bluetooth channels 25 46 are excluded from hopping sequence 2427 2448 MHz e Exclude Wi Fi channel 11 Bluetooth channels 50 71 are excluded from hopping sequence 2452 2473 MHz e Exclude Wi Fi channel 1 6 and 11 Bluetooth channels 2 19 2404 2421 MHz 26 45 2428 2447 MHz and 51 69 2453 2471 MHz are excluded from hopping sequence e Exclude Wi Fi channels 1 and 6 Bluetooth channels 0 21 2402 2423 MHz and 25 46 2427 2448 MHz are excluded from hopping sequence e Exclude Wi Fi channels 1 and 11 Bluetooth channels 0 21 2402 2423 MHz and 50 71 2452 2473 MHz are excluded from hopping sequence e Exclude Wi Fi channel 6 and 11 Bluetooth channels 25 46 2427 2448 MHz and 50 71 2452 2473 MHz are excluded from hopping sequence Radio Communications 4 9 Wi Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion continued Use All Channels Standard AFH Exclude Wi Fi Channel 1
152. and Emulation Interface WNTPOCUCHION EE 11 1 Connecting Using Wand Emulation E 11 2 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults 11 3 Wand Emulation Host Parameters ccccccccccccccccccecceseeceeuuceseuceseueceseaceeuuuseueaceeuuueeueeeeuaeesuaneeuaasas 11 4 Wand Emulation Host Types Ze ieten deeg 11 4 Table of Contents xi Leading Margin Quiet Zone EE 11 4 Polarity eege eege 11 5 Ignore Unknown CRAPAClels ccctscctiicccnartaransailancntotaaceatinchonnnetentaitaiaaraiunteniaumetautidestarsaaiyaaneawiads 11 5 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 WE 11 6 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII ssssssesssssrrresssessrrrreseseoeossesssenerorrrntannnrnrnnunnnnnutnnnnnnnennteteeneneeeeo 11 6 Chapter 12 Scanner Emulation Interface Connecting Using Scanner Emulation cceeceeeeeseeeceeeeeee ene sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaeseseeseenensenensenees 12 2 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults ccc ccccccccccccceeccseeceeeuceeuuecssuucseueaceueaueeeaaeeueasseueeueaenes 12 3 Scanner Emulation AOSt EE 12 3 Scanner Emulation Host Parameters cccccccecccceeccccecceueceeuuceeuueseeueeeeueaseuuaeeeuaeesuuaseuaueeeuaaeesaaaees 12 4 areca cee cen erate cance ANRE renin asdee ounce en Erai aAa Ni 12 4 Parameter Pass TArOUOM E 12 5 Convert Newer Code KEE 12 6 Module Wiat 22 2esgegeg etegene Ehe NE E A 12 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 20 12 7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion oo cccecccccccccceccceeeeseceeseeueesuueeeeueeeeaueeeueaueeauuesa
153. and decodes it Scanner Emulation connection to a host The cradle CRO078 S only CR0078 P does not support Scanner Emulation is connected to a portable data terminal a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse adapter cable CRO078 S only CR0078 P does not support Synapse The cradle auto detects the host Configuration via 123Scan NOTE Only the Symbol Native API SNAPI interface supports image capture See USB Device Type on page 7 5 to enable this host Unpacking the Digital Scanner and Cradle Remove the digital scanner and cradle from their respective packing and inspect for damage If the digital scanner or cradle was damaged in transit contact Motorola Solutions Support See page xx for contact information KEEP THE PACKING It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment ever needs to be returned for servicing Getting Started 1 3 Parts Scanner Battery Door Latch Metal Charging Contacts Figure 1 2 Parts of the Digital Scanner 1 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide CR0078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle Pairing Bar Code Convertible Mount Hook Charging LED Charging Communications Contacts Figure 1 3 CR0078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle Front View Mounting Hole Rubber Foot Host Cable Groove Getting Started 1 5
154. ange the default values scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 6 1 maging Preferences Default Parameters Page Number Parameter Parameter Default Number Imaging Preferences Operational Modes N A N A 6 4 Image Capture Illumination 361 Enable 6 5 Gain Exposure Priority for Snapshot 562 Autodetect 6 6 Mode Snapshot Mode Timeout 323 0 30 seconds 6 7 Snapshot Aiming Pattern 300 Enable 6 7 Image Cropping 301 Disable 6 7 Crop to Pixel Addresses 315 0 top 6 8 316 0 left 317 479 bottom 318 751 right Image Size Number of Pixels 302 Full 6 9 Image Brightness Target White 390 180 6 10 JPEG Image Options 299 Quality 6 10 JPEG Target File Size 561 160 kB 6 11 Imaging Preferences 6 3 Table 6 1 Imaging Preferences Default Parameters Continued Parameter ade Default De JPEG Quality and Size Value 305 65 6 11 Image Enhancement 564 Off 0 6 12 Image File Format Selection 304 JPEG 6 13 Image Rotation 665 0 6 14 Bits per Pixel BPP 303 8 BPP 6 15 Signature Capture 93 Disable 6 16 Signature Capture Image File Format 313 JPEG 6 17 Selection Signature Capture
155. apshot Aiming Pattern Parameter 300 Select Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode or Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern 1 Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern 0 Image Cropping Parameter 301 This parameter crops a captured image Select Disable Image Cropping to present the full 752 x 480 pixels Select Enable Image Cropping to crop the image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel Addresses on page 6 8 Enable gen Cropping Disable Image Cropping Use Full 752 x 480 Pixels 0 6 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Crop to Pixel Addresses Parameter 315 Top Parameter 316 Left Parameter 317 Bottom Parameter 318 Right If you selected Enable Image Cropping set the pixel addresses from 0 0 to 751 479 to crop to Columns are numbered from 0 to 751 rows from 0 to 479 Specify four values for Top Left Bottom and Right where Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses and Left and Right correspond to column pixel addresses For example for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom right section of the image set the following values Top 476 Bottom 479 Left 744 Right 751 T
156. are used to highlight chapters and sections in this and related documents e Bold text is used to highlight parameter names and options e bullets indicate e Action items e Lists of alternatives e Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential e Sequential lists e g those that describe step by step procedures appear as numbered lists e Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks are used to denote default parameter settings KC Baud Rate 9600 Feature Option Indicates Default J NOTE This symbol indicates something of special interest or importance to the reader Failure to read the note will not result in physical harm to the reader equipment or data CAUTION This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility of data or material damage may A occur WARNING This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility that serious personal A injury may occur XX DS6878 Product Reference Guide Related Documents e The DS6878 Quick Start Guide p n 72 131700 xx provides general information to help the user get started with the digital scanner It includes basic operation instructions and start up bar codes e The CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 135874 xx provides information to help the user set up and use the charge only and host interface cradles It includes set up and mounting instructions e The CR0078 P Cradle Quick
157. as memory available for storing a remote Bluetooth address for each Master mode SPP Cradle When switching between these modes the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to the last device it was connected to in that mode J NOTE Switching between Bluetooth host types by scanning a host type bar code page 4 4 causes the radio to be reset Scanning is disabled during this time It takes several seconds for the digital scanner to re initialize the radio at which time scanning is enabled 4 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range it immediately attempts to reconnect While the digital scanner attempts to reconnect the green LED continues to blink If the auto reconnect process fails the digital scanner emits a page timeout beep long low long high and stops blinking the LED The process can be restarted by pulling the trigger The Beep on Reconnect Attempt feature is disabled by default When enabled the digital scanner emits 5 short high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Radio Communications 4 19 Reconnect Attempt Interval When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range it immedia
158. ata format does not specify the Encoding Table used for encoding e Raw Format Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3 e Alphanumeric Encoding Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table e Numeric Encoding Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications available at http www auspost com au Autodiscriminate 0 Raw Format 1 Alphanumeric Encoding 2 Numeric Encoding 3 Symbologies 15 65 Netherlands KIX Code Parameter 326 To enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Netherlands KIX Code 1 Disable Netherlands KIX Code 0 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail Parameter 592 To enable or disable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail scan the appropriate bar code below Enable USPS 4CB One Codel Intelligent Mail 1 Disable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 0 15 66 DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPU FICS Postal Parameter 611 To enable or disable UPU FICS Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPU FICS Postal 1 Disable UPU FICS Postal 0
159. ate J NOTE The digital scanner does not use Low Power Mode when connected to a USB or IBM host Time Delay to Time Delay to Time Delay to Presentation Presentation Low Power Idle Mode value Sleep Mode value Mode value Active Mode Idle Mode _ Sleep Mode p Low Power Mode Note Time delays are cumulative Figure 5 1 Power Levels User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 23 Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode Parameter 663 In Presentation Mode this parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering idle mode with dim illumination The digital scanner wakes upon presentation of a bar code or a trigger pull Disable 0 1 Second 1 10 Seconds 10 4 Minute 17 5 Minutes 21 15 Minutes 27 5 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode continued 30 Minutes 29 45 Minutes 30 1 Hour 33 3 Hours 35 6 Hours 38 9 Hours 41 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 25 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode Parameter 662 In Presentation Mode this parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering sleep mode with no illumination The digital scanner wakes when it senses motion upon presentation of a bar code
160. bar codes Enable OCR A 1 Disable OCR A 0 OCR A Variant Parameter 684 Font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font To choose a variant scan one of the following bar codes Selecting the most appropriate font variant optimizes performance and accuracy OCR A supports the following variants e OCR A Full ASCII I 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR A Reserved 1 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ e OCR A Reserved 2 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR A Banking 0123456789 lt gt YAS Special banking characters output as the following representative characters Y outputs as f H outputs as c JP outputs as h t NOTE Enable OCR A before setting this parameter If disabling OCR A set the variant to its default OCR A Full ASCII 14 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR A Variant continued OCR A Full ASCII 0 OCR A Reserved 1 1 OCR A Reserved 2 2 OCR A Banking 3 OCR Programming 14 5 Enable Disable OCR B Parameter 681 To enable or disable OCR B scan one of the following bar codes Enable O
161. blicly Available Software Legal Notices Publicly available software list Name Version Description Software Site Source Code License Regular Expression Evaluator 8 3 Compiles and executes regular expressions http www freebsd org cgi cvsweb cgi src lib libc regex No Source Distribution Obligations Motorola will not provide nor distribute the Source Code for the Regular Expression Evaluator BSD Style License 1992 Henry Spencer 1992 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Henry Spencer of the University of Toronto Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products deriv
162. bologies Bar code symbol is unreadable Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced Distance between digital scanner and bar code is incorrect Move the digital scanner closer to or further from the bar code See Decode Ranges on page 2 8 The scan line is not crossing every bar and space of the symbol Move the symbol until the scan line is within the acceptable aiming pattern See Figure 2 1 on page 2 5 Digital Scanner decodes bar code but does not transmit the data to the host Digital Scanner is not programmed for the correct host type Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code See the chapter corresponding to the host type Interface cable is loose Ensure all cable connections are secure Cradle is not programmed for the correct host interface Check digital scanner host parameters or edit options Digital Scanner not paired to host connected interface Pair the digital scanner to the cradle by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Possible Causes Cradle has lost connection to host Possible Solutions In this exact order disconnect power supply disconnect host cable wait three seconds reconnect host cable reconnect power supply reestablish pairing Digital Scanner emits five l
163. c tie densntinceceaeeseancicct2sacuteniedsduancectin diese Ora teadense canes 9 4 Keyboard Wedge Host Re 9 4 Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes cccececceesesseeeeeeeeeeesneenseneeeeeeeeeneenseneees 9 5 Ignore Unknown en 9 7 Keystr ke RE 9 7 Intra Keystroke eleng Zeleeieder eet AAR 9 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation ccccccscseeeeecneeeeeneeeseeeceeeeeeeeseseneeeeeseeenseeeceeeeesereenes 9 8 Caps Lock NEEN 9 9 Caps Lock Override sirsenis EA EEEE EEEREN TRAER EA RARE E a E E E a EEs 9 9 Convert Wedge Data E 9 10 Function Key Mapping 2egugneueesungCneggeeeee enken ENEE heen 9 10 IC WEE EE 9 11 Send Make and EE 9 11 Keyboard Maps eege 9 12 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge 22 ccccceeesssecneeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeneesennesenaeaeeeeeeeenenseneeneees 9 13 Chapter 10 IBM Interface rie ele EE 10 1 Connecting to an IBM 468X 469X Host ege sasctcciricrandeivadsecadinneeic ca Nee EE Eege 10 2 IBM 468X 469X Parameter Defaults sic cacsccccstcntssseeisctnedendiladoatiatubeereatdaustcebiotadsanadiamlebangcetsadadaandenes 10 3 IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters cccccccccscceeceeecceecceceeeeceaecceceneccaeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 10 4 EGRET Ae aE A EAD 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 2 c xiccsciscsctuccnieieanruneavacvantecedanvenotucre teecadidehedextendseesrendalivebdtrxntauntes 10 5 Optional IBM Parameters eege Eden 10 6 POMS Beep EE 10 6 Ueleg Bar Tee le TC BE 10 6 Chapter 11 W
164. can the bar code below to disconnect the digital scanner from its cradle PC host An unpairing bar code is also included in the DS6878 Quick Reference Guide Unpairing Radio Communications 4 25 Pairing Bar Code Format When the digital scanner is configured as an SPP Master you must create a pairing bar code for the remote Bluetooth device to which the digital scanner can connect The Bluetooth address of the remote device must be known Pairing bar codes are Code 128 bar codes and are formatted as follows lt Fnc 3 gt BXXXXXXXXXXXX where s B or LNKB is the prefix e XXXXXXXXXXXX represents the 12 character Bluetooth address Pairing Bar Code Example If the remote device to which the digital scanner can connect has a Bluetooth address of 11 22 33 44 55 66 then the pairing bar code is Paring Bar Code Content II Ui B Bluetooth Address B112233445566 4 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connection Maintenance Interval J NOTE The Connection Maintenance Interval only applies in locked pairing mode see page 4 23 When a digital scanner disconnects from a cradle due to a Link Supervision Timeout the digital scanner immediately attempts to reconnect to the cradle for 30 seconds If the auto reconnect process fails it can be restarted by pulling the digital scanner trigger To guarantee that a disconnected digital scanner can reconnect when it
165. can the following bar code then scan a three digit number between 003 and 100 using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting represents the number of OCR characters to decode Strings of OCR characters greater than the maximum are ignored The default is 100 OCR Maximum Characters OCR Security Level Parameter 554 To select the OCR decoding security confidence level scan the following bar code then scan a two digit number using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting represents the level of confidence Greater numbers minimize OCR decoding errors but reduce performance Setting a value that is too high can result in failure to decode Setting a value that is too low can cause decoding errors The range of the security level is 10 90 and the default is 80 OCR Security Level 14 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Subset Parameter 686 Set an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant For example if scanning only numbers and the letters A B and C create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts To set or modify the OCR font subset first enable the appropriate OCR font s Next scan the following bar code then scan numbers and letters to form the OC
166. canned For factory default values see Chapter A Standard Default Parameters beginning on page A 1 e Set Factory Defaults Scan the Set Factory Defaults bar code below to eliminate all custom default values and set the scanner to factory default values For factory default values see Chapter A Standard Default Parameters beginning on page A 1 e Write to Custom Defaults Custom default parameters can be configured to set unique default values for all parameters After changing all parameters to the desired default values scan the Write to Custom Defaults bar code below to configure custom defaults Restore Defaults Set Factory Defaults Write to Custom Defaults 5 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parameter Bar Code Scanning Parameter 236 To disable the decoding of parameter bar codes including the Set Defaults parameter bar codes scan the Disable Parameter Scanning bar code below To enable decoding of parameter bar codes scan Enable Parameter Scanning Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 1 Disable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 0 Beep After Good Decode Parameter 56 Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the digital scanner beeps after a good decode If selecting Do Not Beep After Good Decode the beeper still operates during parameter menu scan
167. canner s capability Matrix 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Matrix 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 Length Within Range Matrix 2 of 5 Any Length Symbologies 15 57 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter 622 The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 1 Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 0 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter 623 Scan a bar code below to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 1 Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 0 15 58 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Korean 3 of 5 Enable Disable Korean 3 of 5 Parameter 581 To enable or disable Korean 3 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below J NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6 Enable Korean 3 of 5 1
168. canner Battery Fully charge the digital scanner battery before using the digital scanner for the first time To charge the digital scanner battery place the digital scanner in the cradle ensuring that the metal contacts on the bottom of the digital scanner touch the contacts on the cradle The battery begins charging when the digital scanner LED indicator starts flashing green for the CR0078 S cradle and turns solid green for the CR0078 P cradle A complete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to three hours using external power and up to five hours using non external cable power CAUTION To avoid a battery temperature fault always charge the battery in the digital scanner within the recommended temperature of 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Charging LED When powered up the cradle LED is always green The digital scanner LED flashes green during charging See Table 2 2 on page 2 3 for all charging LED indications Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery To shut off the NiMH battery for long term storage or shipping Battery Off 2 To turn the battery back on place the digital scanner in the cradle 1 Scan Battery Off below J NOTE Always scan the Battery Off bar code in handheld mode 1 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery To maintain optimal performance of the digital scanner NiMH battery perfo
169. ccsccscccsccceceeeeceaneneccaeceeeceecceecenaecneceaecceeceeeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeseceeeeeseneeseeseeeseneeenenigss 5 8 BOCPer VOIUMGE sissen o a aN dave sdaweteveeceducnentacaavetvaarveantevuateevaatevantacunureeanieeeris 5 9 Beeper Duration EE 5 10 Beep on Insertion 2 0 0 eeeeecseccencccaeeeececeecaeeceeeeecenaeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeetenetnis 5 10 Decode Pager Motor EE 5 11 Decode Pager Motor Duration tagged dE Ende geheegt ergi 5 11 le ug IS EE 5 13 Een lee TE 5 15 Hand held Trigger Mode sisicoiccccsscvsscuceeteccanetinantatatencesnwnts alco ttncenemenascusannaetenneeadduceonbecasnentawatcens 5 17 Hands free le EE 5 18 Presentation Performance Mode ccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeegs 5 19 Low Power Mode 5 20 Time Delay to Hand held Low Power Mode ccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeneenens 5 20 vili DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner Activity Modes cc siccedecccassvasecuccatdsicaatechodaniaiugten visice aidrecdexctannsonteretsursedeusademtausaread 5 22 Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode cc cceeee ee eeeeeeeeeneceeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeneseeeeeeeenenenseeees 5 23 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode eEEEEERRRRREEEREEEEEREEERRREEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEERSEE EEN 5 25 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode Continued ec ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 5 26 Timeo
170. challenging bar codes such as those on a mobile phone display where the backlight has dimmed This mode is also recommended for applications that include many truncated or poor quality bar codes Because swipe speed is reduced present bar codes to the digital scanner rather than swiping them when using this mode Standard Presentation Mode 2 Enhanced Presentation Mode 0 Traditional Presentation Mode 3 5 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Low Power Mode Parameter 128 If enabled the digital scanner enters a low power consumption mode after Sleep Mode has expired in which the LEDs turn off in order to conserve energy and prolong the life of the scanner The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted senses a trigger pull or when the host attempts to communicate If disabled power remains on after each decode attempt Disable Low Power Mode 0 Enable Low Power Mode 1 Time Delay to Hand held Low Power Mode Parameter 146 This parameter sets the time it takes the digital scanner to enter reduced power mode after any scanning activity Scan the appropriate bar code below to set the time 400 msec 65 500 msec 69 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 21 Time Delay to Hand held Low Power Mode continued
171. character For Code ID Characters see Symbol Code Characters on page B 1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B 3 PY NOTE f you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character and enable Transmit No Read Message on page 5 57 the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message Symbol Code ID Character 2 AIM Code ID Character 1 None 0 5 48 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Prefix Suffix Values Key Category Parameter P 99 S1 98 S2 100 Decimal Value Parameter P 105 S1 104 S2 106 You can append a prefix and or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing To set a value for a prefix or suffix scan a four digit number i e four bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that corresponds to that value See Table E on page E 1 for the four digit codes When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix set the key category parameter to 1 then set the 3 digit decimal value See Table E on page E 1 for the four digit codes To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 wf NOTE To use Prefix Suffix values first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5 49 Scan Prefix 7 Scan Suffix 1 6 Scan Suffix 2 8 Data Format Cancel User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 49 Scan Data Transmission Format Paramet
172. character or numeric value Bits are numbered from the right 0 through 7 with bit O the low order bit One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character C CDRH Center for Devices and Radiological Health A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation CDRH Class 1 This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification This class is considered intrinsically safe even if all laser output were directed into the eye s pupil There are no special operating procedures for this class CDRH Class 2 No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human exposure Character A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function such as a number letter punctuation mark or communications control contained in a message Character Set Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology Check Digit A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is decoded Codabar A discrete self checking co
173. ckly but causes problems if users leave the work area for extended periods A longer interval allows existing users to leave the work area for longer periods of time but ties up the system for new users To avoid this conflict users who are going off shift can scan the unpair bar code on page 4 24 to ignore the Connection Maintenance Interval and make the connection immediately available Radio Communications 4 27 To set the Connection Maintenance Interval scan one of the bar codes below Set Interval to 15 Minutes Set Interval to 30 Minutes Set Interval to 60 Minutes Set Interval to 2 Hours Set Interval to 4 Hours Set Interval to 8 Hours Set Interval to 24 Hours Set Interval to Forever 4 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Page Button The CR0078 P cradle offers a page button see CR0078 P Series Cradle on page 1 6 The page button is a sensor that when touched causes paired scanners to emit a beeping sequence The default is Disable Page Button 1 Place your finger over the button sensor at 2 Press down for approximately 1 second 3 The cra
174. code or Cancel bar code was scanned Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device try to re connect check remote device configuration Digital Scanner emits long low long high long low long high beeps Out of host parameter storage space Scan Default Parameters on page 5 5 Out of memory for ADF rules Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules Connection attempt was rejected by remote device Free up remote device resources Digital Scanner emits high high high low beeps RS 232 receive error Normal during host reset Otherwise set the digital scanner s RS 232 parity to match the host setting Digital Scanner emits high low beeps The digital scanner is buffering Code 39 data Or Keyboard parameter selected Normal Or Enter value using bar code keypad Bluetooth disconnection event Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device In Master SPP mode re pair the digital scanner and cradle by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle check cradle power In Slave SPP HID mode reestablish connection between the digital scanner and remote device from the remote device side Digital Scanner emits three long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full Scan the Code 3
175. code settings to all connected digital scanners In this mode programming one digital scanner applies the settings to all connected digital scanners To select Point to Point or Multipoint to Point mode scan the appropriate bar code Multipoint to Point Mode Point to Point Mode 4 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only When in multipoint to point mode enable Parameter Broadcast to broadcast all parameter bar codes scanned to all other digital scanners in the piconet If disabled parameter bar codes are processed by the individual digital scanner only and the digital scanner ignores parameters broadcast from other digital scanners or from the cradle Enable Parameter Broadcast Disable Parameter Broadcast Pairing Pairing is the process by which a digital scanner initiates communication with a cradle Scanning Multipoint to Point activates multi digital scanner to cradle operation and allows up to three digital scanners to pair to one cradle for the CR0078 S and up to seven digital scanners for the CR0078 P To pair the digital scanner with the cradle scan the pairing bar code A high low high low beep sequence indicates that the pairing bar code was decoded When a connection between the cradle and digital scanner is established a low high beep sounds J NOTE 1 The pairing bar code that connects the digital scanner to a cradle is u
176. comes back in range the cradle reserves the connection for that digital scanner for a period of time defined by the Connection Maintenance Interval If the cradle is supporting the maximum three digital scanners and one digital scanner disconnects a fourth digital scanner cannot pair to the cradle during this interval To connect another digital scanner either wait until the connection maintenance interval expires then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle with the new digital scanner or scan Lock Override page 4 23 with the new digital scanner then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle A NOTE Wien the CR0078 S cradle supports the maximum three digital scanners and the CR0078 P supports the maximum seven digital scanners it stores the remote pairing address of each digital scanner in memory regardless of the digital scanner condition e g discharged battery When you want to change the digital scanners paired to the cradle unpair each digital scanner currently connected to the cradle by scanning the Unpairing bar code prior and reconnect each appropriate digital scanner by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Connection Maintenance Interval options are e 15 minutes e 30 minutes e One hour e Two hours e Four hours e Eight hours e 24 hours e Indefinitely Considerations The system administrator determines the Connection Maintenance Interval A shorter interval allows new users to gain access to abandoned connections more qui
177. commands to set the FN1 substitution value set the key category parameter to 1 then set the 3 digit keystroke value See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus Set FN1 Substitution Value 2 Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface Enter the 4 digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes 1 Scan the bar code below To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel To enable FN1 substitution for USB Keyboard HID scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 5 50 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 51 Transmit No Read Message Parameter 94 Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message Enable this to transmit the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout expires See Decode Session Timeout on page 5 33 Disable this to send nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode J NOTE f you enable Transmit No Read and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 5 47 the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message Enable No Read 1
178. creen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an IBM 468X 469X host computer Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks E n Indicates Denia EE Feature Option 10 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting to an IBM 468X 469X Host J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds Interface Cable Host Port Connector Figure 10 1 BM Direct Connection To connect the IBM 46XX interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the Cables to the CRO078 S CR0O008 S Cradle on page 1 8 or Connecting the CR0078 P Series Cradle on page 1 9 2 Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host typically Port 9 3 Select the port address by scanning the approp
179. croQR 0 Symbologies 15 79 Aztec Parameter 574 To enable or disable Aztec scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Aztec 1 Disable Aztec 0 Aztec Inverse Parameter 589 This parameter sets the Aztec inverse decoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular Aztec bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse Aztec bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes Regular 0 Inverse Only 1 Inverse Autodetect 2 15 80 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Redundancy Level Parameter 78 The digital scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality As redundancy levels increase the digital scanner s aggressiveness decreases Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality Redundancy Level 1 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Table 15 2 Redundancy Level 1 Codes Code Type Code Length Codabar 8 characters or less MSI 4 characters or less D2of5 8 characters or less l2of5 8 characters or less Redundancy Level 2 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Table 15 3 Redundancy Level 2 Codes Code Type Code Length All All Redundancy Level 3 Code types other than the
180. d engen 5 37 Multicode Expression ccccccceccecceeee eee eeee eee ee eee eeeceee cea eeaeseeseeeeeesseeseeesaeeaeeeseesseeeeeerseeseeeseeeeees 5 38 Multicode Mode Concatenation 5 43 Multicode Concatenation Symbology siciccssciscctictecedassedatnnidabeaidauukdiedeetanendasbedtsahdannsdeveddeeredssaes 5 44 Multicode Troubleshooting pe ieEieeesdeesguenbeess n Aerer sengen bebes ger 5 45 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters cccccccccceccceccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneenenenes 5 47 Transmit Code ID Character cccccccccccccecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeneees 5 47 Pre SUX lee ie ee eege eege Eed Dee 5 48 Scan Data Transmission Format cccccccceceeceeeeeee cette eee sent eee eeeee eget gee egesegeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeeeee 5 49 ENT Substitution Value s nosece E E aE E EERE EE 5 50 Transmit No Read Message EN 5 51 Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval snnseeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeetttetttettttttttttttttttttttttttttttttEEttEEEE EEEE EEEn EEEE EE 5 52 Dump Scanner Parameters ccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaaaaaaeaaaeaaaaaaaeeaaeaaaeaaeseaeeeaeeaeeees 5 53 Ke le Tele BEE 5 53 Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences Introduction EE 6 1 Scanning Sequence Examples ccccecccecceee cee eeeee cece eee eee eeee cea eeaeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseesseeseees 6 2 Errors While Scanning E 6 2 Imaging Preferences Parameter Defau
181. d Uniform Symbology Specification USS or the Optical Product Code Council OPCC check digit algorithm Disable 0 USS Check Digit 1 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter 44 OPCC Check Digit 2 Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Enable 1 Do Not Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 0 15 44 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Parameter 82 Enable this parameter to convert 14 character 2 of 5 codes to EAN 13 and transmit to the host as EAN 13 To accomplish this the 2 of 5 code must be enabled and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN 13 check digit Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Enable 1 Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 0 Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Enable Disable Discrete 2 of 5 Parameter 5 To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Discrete 2 of 5 1 Disable Discrete 2 of 5 0 Symbologies 15 45 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 Parameter L1 20
182. d stop characters 15 50 COdG 11 eck aoa oe ales ok eae ed 15 37 code 11 lengths 00 eae 15 37 Code 128 an bccn ks dee dae eee aes es 15 23 code 128 emulation 00 15 75 code 128 lengths usuasaasanaarnnana 15 23 COJE ZO 2 0304 24 00 dod ahah deraos Eer 15 28 transmit butter 15 34 code 39 check digit verification 15 31 code 39 full ASCII 00 15 32 code 39 lengths e0 cee eae 15 30 code 39 transmit check digit 15 31 ELE 15 35 code 93 lengths 0 eee eee 15 35 composite CC A B 0 0c eee 15 71 composite CC 15 71 composite TLC208 aa anaana 15 72 connection maintenance interval 4 26 continuous bar code read 5 32 convert Case 4 16 convert GS1 databar to UPC EAN 15 70 convert UPC E to UPC A 15 19 convert UPC E1 to UPC A 15 19 crop to address e 6 8 Index 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide bar codes data Par A e SE nea daw ks Bau Eh 15 76 data matrix inverse 202 15 76 decode pager motor n a nnana na naaa 5 11 decode pager motor duration 5 11 decode session timeout 5 33 digital imager scanner default table 6 2 discoverable mode 4 7 discrete 2of5 0 20000 ee aee 15 44 Length e oe ade eae AGERE ea EE 15 46 driver s license date format 17 18 no se
183. dard Default Tables ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALTL 2077 ALT M 2078 ALTN 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALTR 2083 ALTS 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z ASCII Character Sets F 7 Table F 3 Misc Key Standard Default Table Misc Key Keystroke 3001 PA 1 3002 PA 2 3003 CMD 1 3004 CMD 2 3005 CMD 3 3006 CMD 4 3007 CMD 5 3008 CMD 6 3009 CMD 7 3010 CMD 8 3011 CMD 9 3012 CMD 10 3013 CMD 11 3014 CMD 12 3015 CMD 13 3016 CMD 14 Table F 4 GUI Shift Keys Other Value Keystroke 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI5 3054 GUI6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI8 3057 GUI 9 The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key F 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 4 GUI Shift Keys Continued Other Value Keystroke 3065 GUIA 3066 GUIB 3067 GUI C 3068 GUID 3069 GUIE 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI 3074 GUI J 3075 GUIK 3076
184. de Concatenation disable Transmit Code ID Character on page 5 47 and check digits Enable Multicode Mode Concatenation 1 Disable Multicode Mode Concatenation 0 5 44 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Multicode Concatenation Symbology Parameter 722 Use this parameter to specify how to transmit the concatenated bar codes decoded as specified by the Multicode Expression Multicode Mode Concatenation must be enabled to use this option Concatenation as Code 128 1 Concatenation as PDF417 2 Concatenation as Data Matrix 3 Concatenation as Maxicode 4 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 45 Multicode Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Programming Use the following suggestions if encountering problems programming a multicode expression e Ensure the expression is valid Invalid expressions are rejected during programming When an expression is rejected the previous expression remains intact If after programming the expression the digital scanner can still decode any bar code the expression was possibly rejected e When programming the multicode expression via parameter bar code the digital scanner generates beeps If any of the following beeps do not sound during programming an error occurred
185. de with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters Code 128 A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements Code 3 of 9 Code 39 A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types including all uppercase letters numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters and space The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide while the remaining 6 are narrow Code 93 An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39 Code Length Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters not including those characters Cold Boot A cold boot restarts a computer and closes all running programs COM Port Communication port ports are identified by number e g COM1 COM2 Continuous Code A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code The absence of gaps allows for greater information density Glossary 3 Cradle A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer and provides a storage place for the terminal when not in use D Dead Zone An area within a scanner s field of view in wh
186. different bar code types enter a leading zero for single digit numbers e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 128 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 128 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 128 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 128 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Select this option to decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability 15 24 DS6878
187. disable Interleaved 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 1 Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 0 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter L1 22 L2 23 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 55 e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan I 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select thi
188. dle LED will turn blue when the scanner is out of the cradle The paired scanner will beep five times If multiple scanners are paired to the cradle all the scanners will beep five times 4 Repeat as necessary J NOTE Scanners out of radio range will not beep when paged Refer to Technical Specifications on page 3 9 for detailed radio range information Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable this feature Disable Page Button Enable Page Button Radio Communications 4 29 Bluetooth Security The digital scanner supports Bluetooth Authentication and Encryption Authentication can be requested by either the remote device or the digital scanner When Authentication is requested the digital scanner uses its programmed PIN code to generate a link key Once Authentication is complete either device may then negotiate to enable Encryption J NOTE A remote device can still request Authentication Authentication To force Authentication with a remote device including the cradle scan the Enable Authentication bar code below To prevent the digital scanner from forcing Authentication scan the Disable Authentication bar code below Enable Authentication Disable Authentication 4 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide PIN Code To set the PIN code e g pa
189. dsaiwaiuendddesdsaceaonveabdataadnestsens 14 14 OCR Bright ia UL L BE 14 15 ELE MK nl EE 14 16 OCR Check Digit Modulus iescht 14 25 xii DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Check Digit Multiplier eeegsenggeietegeeeeere geet eege EEN iaaa 14 26 OCR Check Digit Validation eege eet 14 27 Inverse OCR sissssesscsteviecdyanassiats sistas Wiens A AE REER aE AREE EE N E Ra E ed aR Ree 14 32 Chapter 15 Symbologies NATO GUCHOM EE 15 1 Scanning Sequence Examples cccecccecceccceeeeeee cece eee e eee ee cae eae eeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeesneees 15 1 Errors Wille Scanning E 15 2 Nelson EE 15 2 URC EAN ME 15 7 Enable Disable UPC A A 15 7 Enable Disable UPC E e 15 7 Enable Disable UPC E1 AEN 15 8 Enable Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 ccccccccee cece cece cette eee e eect ete teeta teat aa eaaa dea eeaaaeeaeeesseeeeeeeseeneeeeea 15 8 Enable Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 0 0 0 c eceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeaaeeaaeaaaeeaaeaaaaeaaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaaeeaaeeaeeaas 15 9 Enable Disable Bookland EAN 15 9 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 15 10 User Programmable Supplementals ccccecccecceeceeee cece cece cece eet ee eee geeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenea 15 13 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 15 13 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format 0 00ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeneeeees 15 14 Transmit UPC A Check pe EE 15 15 Transmit UPC E Check Re TE 15 15 Transmit UPC E1 gin E pe EE 15 1
190. e FN1 Substitution Values on page 5 50 to set the Key Category and Key Value Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution Enable Keyboard FN1 Substitution HID Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences When this parameter is enabled the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping see Table 7 2 on page 7 19 Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping 4 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Simulated Caps Lock When enabled the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard Caps Lock state Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case S No Case Conversion Convert All to Upper Case Convert All to LowerCase
191. e ISBN Book Numbers automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum so you do not need to set this OCR B Variant continued OCR Programming 14 7 For the best performance in passport reading fix the target passport and the digital scanner in place 6 5 7 5 J NOTE Enable OCR B before setting this parameter If disabling OCR B set the variant to its default OCR B Full ASCII OCR B Full ASCII 0 OCR B Limited 2 OCR B ISBN 10 or 13 Digit Book Numbers 7 OCR B Banking 1 OCR B ISBN 10 Digit Book Numbers 6 14 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR B Variant continued OCR B Travel Document Version 1 TD1 3 Line ID Cards 3 Travel Document 2 or 3 Line ID Cards Auto Detect 20 OCR B Visa Type A 9 OCR B Travel Document Version 2 TD2 2 Line ID Cards 8 OCR B Passport 4 OCR B Visa Type B 10
192. e Keystroke Character 1000 U CTRL 2 1001 A CTRL A 1002 B CTRL B 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRLE 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRL G 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 i CTRL I HORIZONTAL TAB 1010 J CTRL J 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRLL 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRLN 1015 0 CTRL O 1016 P CTRLP 1017 Q CTRLQ 1018 R CTRLR 1019 S CTRL S 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U CTRL U 1022 V CTRL V 1023 W CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 7 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL UESCT 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 IA 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 JD 1037 IE 1038 IF amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 N 1042 IJ 1043 IK 1044 L 1045 1046 1047 JO 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent USB Interface 7 21 Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1053 1054
193. e Multicode Mode 0 Enable Multicode Mode 1 5 38 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Multicode Expression Parameter 661 Use this feature to program a multicode expression for Multicode Mode grid method The default is 1 which indicates any bar code To set the multicode expression 1 Scan the bar code below 2 Scan bar codes from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting to define the expression 3 Scan the End of Message bar code from Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting Multicode Expression Multicode Expression Syntax n Element 1 Element 2 Element n Where nis the number of elements in the overall expression The multicode expression describes the bar code s that the digital scanner can expect to find in an J image Each element represents one bar code in the digital scanner s field of view The order of elements in the expression is the order in which bar code data from each element transmits to the host Elements are defined using one or more of the following methods e By Region This type of element limits decoding to a specific area within the digital scanner s field of view Region coordinates are defined as the top left and bottom right corners of the region expressed in percentages of the field of view These can range from 0 to 100 or 0x00 to 0x64 in hex for both horizontal and vertical axes A region element is constructed as
194. e a NE 15 74 QR COGE aare onne Mas a a a ew 15 77 QR inverse 15 78 A AAMVA field parsing bar codes 17 7 aCcCesSsor eS 1 17 lanyard hierarkiat eee i A 1 17 ADE eer dena E late aes 16 1 invald rule zs aans CERN a a ER AE 3 4 He iaa arad Ales a ated Gd cee a 11 6 transmit erroi es 3 4 advanced data formatting 3 4 11 6 16 1 AGG esti a beac Wawa eet ate Ra ek Mew raat ek 4 28 aiming options hand held decode aiming pattern 5 35 snapshot aiming pattern 6 7 snapshot mode timeout 6 7 aiming pattern 2 6 6 7 enabling 202 o noes oh epee eas Ee does 5 35 Orientation 2 7 ASCII values keyboard wedge 9 13 RS 232 json dc aiad ind Raay dared anu iD 8 18 standard defaults F 1 DE eege ee 7 19 attributes non parameter 0000 2c eens H 1 attributes non parameter beep on next bootup H 4 beeper led nnna anaana H 3 configuration filename H 2 date of first programming H 2 date of manufacture H 2 firmware version H 5 host trigger session H 4 imagekit version H 5 in cradle detection H 5 model number H 1 night mode 2 00 ee H 2 operational mode H 6 pager motor on scanner H 3 parameter defaults H 4 feDOOt acces et eta ERE EE ee H 4 scankit version H 5 serial number H 1 authentication 4 2 auto reconnect 4 4
195. e appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 lt V NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts and miscellaneous default parameters Table 15 41 Symbologies Default Parameters Parameter EE Default UPC EAN UPC A 1 Enable 15 7 UPC E 2 Enable 15 7 UPC E1 12 Disable 15 8 EAN 8 JAN 8 4 Enable 15 8 EAN 13 JAN 13 3 Enable 15 9 Bookland EAN 83 Disable 15 9 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 2 and 5 digits 16 Ignore 15 10 User Programmable Supplementals 15 13 Supplemental 1 579 Supplemental 2 580 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 80 10 15 13 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID 672 Combined 15 14 Transmit UPC A Check Digit 40 Enable 15 15 Transmit UPC E Check Digit 41 Enable 15 15 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 42 Enable 15 16 UPC A Preamble 34 System Character 15 16 UPC E Preamble 35 System Character 15 17 UPC E1 Preamble 36 System Character 15 18 Convert UPC E toA 37 Disable 15 19 Convert UPC E1 to A 38 Disable 15 19 Symbologies 15 3 Table 15 41 Symbologies Default Parameters Continued Parameter Ke Default ihe be EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend 39 Disable 15 20 Bookland ISBN Format 576 ISBN 10 15
196. e digital scanner None Selected Hand held Scanner Emulation Port 9B Non IBM Scanner Emulation Port 5B Table Top Scanner Emulation Port 17 J NOTE User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection IBM Interface 10 5 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39 Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 10 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Optional IBM Parameters If you configure the digital scanner and find the settings were not saved or changed when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override IBM interface defaults Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the digital scanner Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the digital scanner When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed Disable Enable Ignore Bar Code Configuration The host
197. e keyboard type North American Standard Keyboards French Windows French Canadian Windows 98 French International German Windows 4 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Country Keyboard Types continued Spanish Windows Italian Windows Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows French Canadian Windows 2000 XP Portuguese Brazilian Windows Radio Communications 4 13 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when the HID host requires a slower transmission of data No Delay 0 msec Medium Delay 20 msec HID CAPS Lock Override When enabled the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key This setting is always enabled for the Japan
198. e licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola Inc unless a separate Commercial Third Party Software License is included in which case your use of the Commercial Third Party Software will then be governed by the separate Commercial Third Party License The Publicly Available Software that may be included on this media or in the Motorola Product is listed below The use of the listed Publicly Available Software is subject to the licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola Inc as well as the terms and conditions of the license of each Publicly Available Software package Copies of the licenses for the listed Publicly Available Software as well as all attributions acknowledgements and software information details are included below Motorola is required to reproduce the software licenses acknowledgments and copyright notices as provided by the Authors and Owners thus all such information is provided in its native language form without modification or translation The Publicly Available Software in the list below is limited to the Publicly Available Software included by Motorola The Publicly Available Software included by Commercial Third Party Software or Products that is used in the Motorola Product are disclosed in the Commercial Third Party Licenses or via the respective Commercial Third Party Pu
199. e three parameters changed for example if Beep After Good Decode was enabled before entering Night Mode it returns to enabled upon exiting night mode e When entering Night Mode the pager motor vibrates When exiting Night Mode the scanner emits two short beeps e Scanning a Default Parameters bar code or removing the battery causes the scanner to exit Night Mode e For scanners that do not use a pager motor scanning any of the Night Mode parameters or the pager motor parameters results in an error beep e If the scanner loses power while in Night Mode due to a dead battery or the Battery Off bar code being scanned on the next power up the scanner exits Night Mode and resumes normal operation 5 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Night Mode Trigger Parameter 1215 For DS6878 HC units only manufactured after xx xx 2013 Enable this to use the trigger to toggle between entering and exiting Night Mode To toggle point the scanner away from a bar code pull the trigger until the beam goes off and then continue pulling the trigger for an additional 5 seconds Note that pulling the trigger an additional 5 seconds after decoding a bar code has no affect When entering Night Mode the pager motor vibrates When exiting Night Mode the scanner emits 2 short beeps Enable Night Mode Trigger 1 Disable Night Mode Trigger 0
200. ecoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes Regular 0 Inverse Only 1 Inverse Autodetect 2 J NOTE For HC configurations the default is Inverse Autodetect Symbologies 15 77 Maxicode Parameter 294 To enable or disable Maxicode scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Maxicode 1 Ha Disable Maxicode 0 OR Code Parameter 293 To enable or disable QR Code scan the appropriate bar code below Enable QR Code 1 Disable QR Code 0 15 78 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OR Inverse Parameter 587 This parameter sets the QR inverse decoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular QR bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse QR bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse QR bar codes Regular 0 Inverse Only 1 Inverse Autodetect 2 MicroOR Parameter 573 To enable or disable MicroQR scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MicroQR 1 Disable Mi
201. ect to appropriate host Figure 1 7 Connecting the Cables to the CRO078 S CR0008 S Cradle 6 If applicable thread the interface cable over the cable support hook and run the host and power cables into their respective cable grooves Mount the cradle as necessary For information on mounting the cradle refer to the documentation included with the cradle J NOTE Disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host Different cables are required for different hosts The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only The connectors may be different from those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same Getting Started 1 9 Supplying Power to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle The CR0078 S CRO008 S cradle receives power from one of two sources e An external power supply e When connected to the host through a host cable that supplies power CRO078 S only The cradle detects whether the host or the external supply is supplying power It always draws power from the external supply when available regardless of the presence of power from a host included in box with cradle on the power supply refer to the Power Supply Ferrite Installation instructions included in the box IMPORTANT For healthcare environments use cradle p n CROO78 SC1009BWR and place the ferrite core Using the USB Interface to Supply Power When the CR0078 S cradle is connect
202. ecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty Scanner Emulation Interface 12 3 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 12 1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page 12 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 12 1 Scanner Emulation Default Parameters Parameter Default Page Number Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 12 4 Parameter Pass Through Parameter Process and Pass Through 12 5 Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 12 6 Module Width 20 us 12 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 12 7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 12 7 Transmission Timeout 3 sec 12 8 Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 12 9 Leading Margin 2ms 12 9 Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 12 10 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Scanner Emulation Host Scan the bar code below to enable the Scanner Emulation host Undecoded Scanner Emulation Host 12 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanner Emulation Host Parameters Beep Style The Scann
203. ection beginning on page 8 4 vV miscellaneous default parameters NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and Table 8 1 RS 232 Host Default Parameters Parameter Default Bi a RS 232 Host Parameters RS 232 Host Types Standard 8 6 Baud Rate 9600 8 8 CR0078 P Baud Rate None 8 8 Parity Type None 8 9 Data Bits ASCII Format 8 Bit 8 9 Check Receive Errors Enable 8 10 Hardware Handshaking None 8 10 Software Handshaking None 8 12 Host Serial Response Time out 2 sec 8 14 RTS Line State Low RTS 8 15 Beep on lt BEL gt Disable 8 15 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 8 16 Nixdorf Beep LED Options Normal Operation 8 17 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 8 17 8 3 8 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide RS 232 Host Parameters Various RS 232 hosts are set up with their own parameter default settings Table 8 2 Selecting the ICL Fujitsu Wincor Nixdorf Mode A Wincor Nixdorf Mode B Olivetti Omron or terminal sets the defaults listed below Table 8 2 Terminal Specific RS 232 p Wincor WI Sa Parameter Fujitsu Nixdorf Mode B Olivetti ModeA OPOS JPOS Transmit Code ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Transmission Data Suffix Data Suffix Data Suffix Data Suffix Prefix Data Data Suffix Prefix Data Format Suffix Suffix Suffix CR 1013 CR 1013 CR 1013 CR 1013 ETX 1002 CR 1013 CR 10
204. ed Parameter jae Default SE Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation N A On Bar Code Data 4 20 HID Slave Mode Modes of Operation N A Point to Point 4 21 Point to Point Multipoint to Point Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only N A Enable 4 22 Pairing Modes N A Unlocked 4 23 Pairing on Contacts N A Enable 4 24 Connection Maintenance Interval N A 15 min 4 27 Authentication N A Disable 4 29 Variable Pin Code N A Static 4 30 Encryption N A Disable 4 31 Secure Simple Pairing IO Capability N A No Input No Output 4 32 SPP Server and SPP Master Host Mode Only User Preferences Set Default Parameter N A Set Defaults 5 5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning 236 Enable 5 6 Beep After Good Decode 56 Enable 5 6 Suppress Power Up Beeps 721 Do Not Suppress 5 7 Beeper Tone 145 Medium 5 8 Beeper Volume 140 High 5 9 Beeper Duration 628 Medium 5 10 Beep on Insertion 288 Enabled 5 10 Decode Pager Motor 613 Disable 5 11 Decode Pager Motor Duration 626 150 msec 5 11 Night Mode Trigger 1215 Disable 5 14 Night Mode Toggle N A N A 5 14 Batch Mode 544 Normal Do Not Batch 5 15 Data Hand held Trigger Mode 138 Level 5 17 Hands free Mode 630 Enable 5 18 Presentation Performance Mode 650 Standard 5 19 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 3 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters C
205. ed from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AG IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Motorola Solutions Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http www motorolasolutions com Warranty For the complete Motorola hardware product warranty statement go to http www motorolasolutions com warranty iv DS6878 Product Reference Guide Revision History Changes to the original manual are listed below Change 01 RevA Date 4 2010 Description Initial release 02 RevA 3 2011 Add CR0078 P cradle FIPS configurations Imaging Preferences chapter hands free scanning instructions Page Button Chapter 7 SNAPI Parameters Simple COM Port Emulation Quick Keypad Emulation Polling Interval Frenc
206. ed format BMP File Format 3 JPEG File Format 1 TIFF File Format 4 6 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Image Rotation Parameter 665 This parameter controls the rotation of the image by 0 90 180 or 270 degrees Rotate 0 0 Rotate 90 1 Rotate 180 2 Rotate 270 3 Imaging Preferences 6 15 Bits Per Pixel Parameter 303 Select the number of significant bits per pixel BPP to use when capturing an image Select 1 BPP for a black and white image 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel ff NOTE The digital scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats which only support 8 BPP The digital scanner ignores 1 BPP for TIFF file formats which only support 4 BPP and 8 BPP 1 BPP is coerced to 4 BPP for TIFF file formats 1 BPP 0 4 BPP 1 8 BPP 2 6 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Signature Capture Parameter 93 A signature capture bar code is a special purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area ina document with a machine readable format The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index to various signatures The region i
207. ed to the host via the USB interface it can be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply Powering from a USB host limits charging The digital scanner charges at a slower rate than when charging from an external power supply lt J NOTE The radio link functions normally when the cradle draws power from a USB host Connecting the CR0078 P Series Cradle Connect the interface cable and power supply if necessary in the following order to ensure proper operation of the digital scanner and cradle 1 Insert the interface cable into the cradle s host port 2 Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host 3 Connect the power supply to the cradle s power port 4 Connect the appropriate cable to the power supply and AC power source 5 Thread the interface cable over the cable support hook see Figure 1 6 on page 1 6 and run the host and power cables into their respective cable grooves 1 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide 6 If necessary for non autodetected interfaces scan the appropriate host bar code refer to the CR0078 S CRO008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide for more information Power Port Host Port Host Port Figure 1 8 Connecting the Cables to the CRO078 P Cradle Supplying Power to the CR0078 P Cradle The CR0078 P cradle receives power from an external power supply lt J NOTE The CR0078 S cradle has the ability to be powered by the USB port instead of an external power sup
208. ength Codabar Two Discrete Lengths Codabar Length Within Range Codabar Any Length Symbologies 15 49 CLSI Editing Parameter 54 Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first fifth and tenth characters of a 14 character Codabar symbol Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format PY NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters Enable CLSI Editing 1 Disable CLSI Editing 0 NOTIS Editing Parameter 55 Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format Enable NOTIS Editing 1 Disable NOTIS Editing 0 15 50 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters Transmission Parameter 855 Select whether to transmit upper case or lower case Codabar start stop characters Upper Case 0 Lower Case 1 Symbologies 15 51 MSI Enable Disable MSI Parameter 11 To enable or disable MSI scan the approp
209. er 235 To change the scan data format scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format lt J NOTE f using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix suffix To set values for the prefix and or suffix see Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 48 Data As Is 0 lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt 1 lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 2 lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 3 lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt 4 5 50 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scan Data Transmission Format continued lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt 5 lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 6 lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 7 FN1 Substitution Values Key Category Parameter 103 Decimal Value Parameter 109 The Wedge and USB Keyboard HID hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature Enabling this substitutes any FN1 character 0x1b in an EAN128 bar code with a value This value defaults to 7013 Enter Key When using host
210. er Emulation host supports three beep styles e Beep On Successful Transmit The digital scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode signal to the digital scanner so the digital scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time e Beep At Decode Time The digital scanner beeps upon decode This results in a double beep sequence from most decoders since the digital scanner beeps and the decoder beeps at a different frequency when it successfully decodes the output e Do Not Beep Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep Beep On Successful Transmit Beep At Decode Time Do Not Beep Scanner Emulation Interface 12 5 Parameter Pass Through The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder In this way customers using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning the necessary parameters only once For example to enable D 2 of 5 scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code The digital scanner and the attached decoder both process the parameter Parameter Process and Pass Through Parameter Process Only 12 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert Newer Code Types The digital scanner supports a variety of code typ
211. er connected in USB HID keyboard mode to Microsoft Windows Notepad or Wordpad or with the scanner connected via RS232 to a Windows hyperterminal Use the parameter numbers in this guide or the Attribute Data Dictionary index of parameters to interpret the parameter attribute numbers in this output The Attribute Data Dictionary 72E 149786 xx is located on the Motorola Solutions Support site at http www motorolasolutions com support J NOTE It may be necessary to first scan lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX1 gt for proper formatting See Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5 49 Dump Scanner Parameters Report Version Scan the bar code below to report the version of software currently installed in the imager Report Software Version 5 54 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction You can program the digital scanner to perform various functions or activate different features This chapter describes imaging preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features J NOTE Only the Symbol Native API SNAPI with Imaging interface supports image capture See to enable this host The digital scanner ships with the settings in also see for all host device and miscellaneous defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when you
212. es To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in Wand Emulation Host Parameters beginning on page 11 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 11 1 Wand Emulation Default Parameters Parameter Default eee Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller 11 4 Leading Margin 80 msec 11 4 Polarity Bar High Margin Low 11 5 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 11 5 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 11 6 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 11 6 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection 11 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below Symbol OmnicLink Interface Controller Symbol PDT Terminal MSI Symbol PTC Terminal Telxon User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Leading Margin Quiet Zone Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar of the scan in milliseconds The minimum allowed
213. es in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 39 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Code 39 One Discrete Length Code 39 Two Discrete Lengths Code 39 Length Within Range Code 39 Any Length Symbologies 15 31 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Parameter 48 Enable this feature to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit Enable Code 39 Check Digit 1 Disable Code 39 Check Digit 0 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Parameter 43 Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit Transmit
214. es that are not decodable by attached decoder systems To allow compatibility in these environments the digital scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable symbologies as per the following chart Symbologies not listed on this chart are transmitted normally Scan this code type Transmitted as Code 11 Code 39 Chinese 2 of 5 Code 39 GS1 DataBar 14 Limited and Expanded Code 128 Coupon Code Code 128 When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled the digital scanner issues Convert Error beeps and transmits no data Convert Newer Code Types Reject Newer Code Types Module Width The standard module width is 20 us For an extremely slow decoder system select 50 us Module Width 20 us Module Width 50 us Module Width Scanner Emulation Interface 12 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Scan the bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of all bar code data to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39 Convert All To Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion By default any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If this parameter is enabled the da
215. ese Windows ASCIl keyboard type and can not be disabled Do Not Override Caps Lock Key Disable Long Delay 40 msec Override Caps Lock Key Enable 4 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host and an error beep sounds Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Enable Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Disable Emulate Keypad When enabled all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad For example ASCII A is sent as ALT make 0 65 ALT Break Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation Radio Communications 4 15 HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution When enabled this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 character in an EAN128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user Se
216. eseeetnnss 4 21 Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only cc ecceeceeceseeeeeneeeeneeseeeeeneneeeensenneneeceeeeeeeeneeess 4 22 PaM EE 4 22 Paing BarCode nd 4 25 Connection Maintenance Interval eegene eeng AE EE dd Eege 4 26 Page EE 4 28 E EE 4 29 Authentication 4 29 le E 4 30 See 4 31 Secure Simple Pairing IO Capability SPP Server and SPP Master Host Mode Only 4 32 Connecting an iOS or Android Product With the Digital Scanner 0 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 4 33 Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options Introduction re er a a 5 1 Scanning Sequence Examples cccccccccccceccceccccecceccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 5 2 Errors While Scanning RE 5 2 User Preferences Miscellaneous Option Parameter Defaults 0s eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeeeeees 5 2 lee EE EE tans a a a e 5 5 Default Parameters 0 cccscccsccescccecceeceeaeeeeceaeenaeceecenecceeceeeeceeeeseceeceeeeeeseceeeeeseneeseeseeeeeeeeeentngas 5 5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning ciccviacaxccontzverucadducsosrmzeernsaaseuestccadedecadeuenenbdeevaccadummcndcbeseusadseadone 5 6 Beep After Good Decode 0 ccccecceccccccccecceeeceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteseeeneeeneeenetenees 5 6 Suppress Power Up Been cc cceseesceceneeeeceeeeeaseeaeaeaeeeaeneaaneaanaaeeaaeeaaanaaeeaaeaaaeeaeeeaeeeaeaes 5 7 Beeper TOME ou ccc
217. ether it is hand held or on a countertop Enable Hands free Mode 1 Disable Hands free Mode 0 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 19 Presentation Performance Mode Parameter 650 Select one of the following Presentation Performance Mode options e Standard Presentation Mode is optimized for general purpose scanning i e reading bar codes from standard surfaces such as paper labels or hang tags This mode balances bar code swipe speed the speed a bar code can pass through the field of view and still be read and decode range distance between the digital scanner and the bar code for optimal performance on standard paper based bar codes e Enhanced Presentation Mode is also optimized for general purpose paper based scanning but provides for a faster bar code swipe speed and shorter decode range than Standard Presentation Mode This mode is recommended for applications requiring the highest bar code swipe speed e g automated scanning or a reduced decode range e g to better match EAS deactivation range or reduce the occurrence of inadvertent reads during hands free operation e Traditional Presentation Mode is optimized for applications that require frequent reading of bar codes from mobile phones or PC displays This mode allows more time for the digital scanner to analyze each bar code improving performance on
218. f the DataBar Limited bar code when scanning some UPC symbols that start with digits 9 and 7 e Level 2 Automatic risk detection This level of security may result in erroneous decoding of DataBar Limited bar codes when scanning some UPC symbols The scanner defaults to Level 3 otherwise to Level 1 e Level 3 Security level reflects newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a 5 times trailing clear margin e Level 4 Security level extends beyond the standard required by GS1 This level of security requires a 5 times leading and trailing clear margin GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 1 1 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 2 2 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 3 3 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 4 4 15 70 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN Parameter 397 This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar 14 and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol Enable this to strip the leading 010 from DataBar 14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit and report the bar code as EAN 13 For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros this parameter strips the leading 0100 and reports the bar code as UPC A The UPC A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped
219. gital scanner s capability 15 38 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 11 continued Code 11 One Discrete Length Code 11 Two Discrete Lengths Code 11 Length Within Range Code 11 Any Length Symbologies 15 39 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Parameter 52 This feature allows the digital scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code The options are to check for one check digit check for two check digits or disable the feature To enable this feature scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols Disable 0 One Check Digit 1 Two Check Digits 2 15 40 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit Code 11 Check Digits Parameter 47 This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit s Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Enable 1 Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Disable 0 J NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function Symbologies 15 41 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Enable Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter 6 To enable or
220. grey to each pixel or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel J NOTE The digital scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats which only support 8 BPP 1 BPP 0 4 BPP 1 8 BPP 2 Imaging Preferences 6 19 Signature Capture Width Parameter 366 The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the signature capture area For example a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area would require a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to height To set the width of the signature capture box scan the Signature Capture Width bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 752 decimal Signature Capture Width Default 400 001 752 Decimal Signature Capture Height Parameter 367 To set the height of the signature capture box scan the Signature Capture Height bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 480 decimal Signature Capture Height Default 100 001 480 Decimal Signature Capture JPEG Quality Parameter 421 Scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 005 to 100 where 100 represents
221. h Belgian to USB and KBW chapters GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level Move Cursor parameters PDF417 AZTEC Micro QR Micro PDF Maxicode Data Matrix USPS 4CB and UPU FICS Postal Appendix G Signature Capture Correct 5 Secs parameter in Chapter 5 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim Send Alt 2 and add Send Alt parameters in ADF chapter Remove Baud Rates 600 1200 2400 and 4800 Stop Bit Select section 03 RevA 1 2012 Add French International Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols Presentation Mode Field of View Australia Post Format USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero USB Static CDC Update LED indicator definitions battery specification Beeper Tone description Beep on Insertion parameter number Batch Mode parameter number Add note to indicate that the default is Enable for HC Configurations and Disable for Non HC Configurations for the following parameters GS1 Databar Limited Composite A B Composite C Datamatrix and Beep on Decoding Correct Disable Page Button bar code Set Pin Code parameter Remove Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy parameter Change Date Description 04 Rev A 12 2013 Update URLs Remove cradle Wall Mount Bracket Template Replaced parameter SSI values with attribute numbers Add Apple iOS HID Feature and Android HID Feature Add Secure Simple Pairing IO Capability Add Connecting an iOS or Android Product With the Digi
222. h Mode 2 Enter Batch Mode Out of Range Batch Mode 1 Cradle Contact Batch Mode 3 Send Batch Data User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 17 Hand held Trigger Mode Parameter 138 Select one of the following trigger modes for the digital scanner e Standard Level A trigger pull activates decode processing Decode processing continues until the bar code decodes you release the trigger or the Decode Session Timeout occurs e Auto Aim If the primary trigger trigger A is set to imager this trigger mode turns on the laser aiming pattern when you lift the digital scanner A trigger pull activates decode processing After 2 seconds of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off Standard Level 0 Auto Aim 9 5 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hands free Mode Parameter 630 In hands free mode the digital scanner automatically triggers when presented with a bar code Lifting the digital scanner causes it to behave according to the setting of the Hand held Trigger Mode on page 5 17 J NOTE The CR0078 P cradle is required for hands free mode If you select Disable Hands free Mode the digital scanner behaves according to the setting of the Hand held Trigger Mode regardless of wh
223. haracter to use as the date separator immediately following the date format bar code To select no date separator scan the No Separator DL parsing rule immediately following the date format bar code CCYYMMDD CCYYDDMM MMDDCCYY MMCCYYDD DDMMCCYY DDCCYYMM Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 19 Date Format continued YYMMDD YYDDMM MMDDYY MMYYDD DDMMYY DDYYMM No Separator Scan this bar code immediately following a date format bar code to use no separator character between the date fields No Separator 17 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters Control Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send Send Control A Send Control B Send Control C Send Control D Send Control E Send Control F Send Control G Send Control H Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 21 Control Characters continued
224. he cradle LED turns blue when the scanner is out of the cradle Amber Flash Critical battery temperature fault Battery is above or below normal operating temperature If this occurs do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature Note For appropriate charging temperatures see Table 3 3 on page 3 10 Scanning 2 5 Scanning To program the digital scanner see the appropriate host chapter Chapter 4 Radio Communications and Chapter 15 Symbologies In addition to the parameters included in these chapters user preferences and miscellaneous digital scanner options are also available in this guide Hand held Scanning To scan 1 Ensure all connections are secure see appropriate host chapter 2 Aim the digital scanner at the bar code 3 Press the trigger Figure 2 1 Scanning 4 Upon successful decode the digital scanner beeps and the LED flashes green For more information about beeper and LED definitions see Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 2 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hands free Scanning The digital scanner is in hands free presentation mode when it sits in the CRO078 P cradle In this mode the digital scanner operates in continuous constant on mode where it automatically decodes a bar code presented in the field of view T
225. ht ALT key 7 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 4 USB GUI Key Character Set Continued GUI Key Keystroke 3082 GUIR 3083 GUIS 3084 GUIT 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Note GUI Shift Keys The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key Table 7 5 USB F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 USB Interface 7 27 Table 7 5 USB F Key Character Set Continued F Keys Keystroke 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 Table 7 6 USB Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 7 6043 6044 undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock 7 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 7 USB Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 PgUp 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll
226. ially from one device to another S Scan Area Area intended to contain a symbol Scanner An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol Its three main components are 1 Light source laser or photoelectric cell illuminates a bar code 2 Photodetector registers the difference in reflected light more light reflected from spaces 3 Signal conditioning circuit transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern Scanning Mode The scanner is energized programmed and ready to read a bar code Scanning Sequence A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus Self Checking Code A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol Space The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars Specular Reflection The mirror like direct reflection of light from a surface which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code SPP Serial Port Profile Glossary 7 Start Stop Character A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code Substrate A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed Symbol A scannable unit
227. icense Parsing No Driver s License Parsing 17 3 Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes N A 17 4 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes N A 17 7 Set Default Parameter N A 17 17 Output Gender as M or F N A 17 17 Date Format CCYYMMDD 17 18 No Separator N A 17 19 Send Keystroke N A 17 20 Control Characters 17 20 Keyboard Characters 17 24 Parsing Rule Example N A 17 39 Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example N A 17 43 Drivers License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 3 Driver s License Parsing To enable driver s license parsing on the digital scanner scan the Embedded Driver s License Parsing bar code Scan the bar codes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the digital scanner outputs See Parsing Driver s License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing on page 17 3 for more information f No Driver s License Parsing Embedded Driver s License Parsing Parsing Driver s License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing To begin programming a parsing rule 1 Scan Begin New Drivers License Parse Rule on page 17 4 2 Scan any of the field bar codes on the following pages or Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters on page 17 20 to complete the parsing rule 3 After entering the entire rule scan Save Drivers License Parse Rule on page 17 4 to save the rule
228. ich specular reflection may prevent a successful decode Decode To recognize a bar code symbology e g UPC EAN and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned Decode Algorithm A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol Decryption Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data Also see Encryption and Key Depth of Field The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width Discrete Code A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters intercharacter gaps are not part of the code Discrete 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars two of which are wide The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded spaces are insignificant Only numeric characters 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded E EAN European Article Number This European International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards Element dimensions are specified metrically EAN is used primarily in retail Element Generic term for a bar or space Encoded Area Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern including start stop characters and data ENQ RS 232 ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent
229. icroPDF417 1 Disable MicroPDF417 0 Symbologies 15 75 Code 128 Emulation Parameter 123 Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format on page 15 14 must be enabled for this parameter to work Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes C1 if the first codeword is 903 905 C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 CO if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes L3 if the first codeword is 903 905 L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 UR if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation J NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906 907 912 914 and 915 are not supported Use GS1 Composites instead Enable Code 128 Emulation 1 Disable Code 128 Emulation 0 15 76 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Data Matrix Parameter 292 To enable or disable Data Matrix scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Data Matrix 1 Disable Data Matrix 0 Data Matrix Inverse Parameter 588 This parameter sets the Data Matrix inverse d
230. igital Scanner battery requires frequent charging Digital Scanner displays solid red LED longer than 3 seconds when placed in cradle Battery may need reconditioning Battery may require pre charge due to excessive discharge Restore the battery by performing a battery reconditioning cycle See Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 16 for more information Wait for the red LED to turn green indicating that the scanner has begun normal charging Recommend allowing battery to fully recharge Beeper Indications Digital Scanner emits low high low beeps ADF transmit error See Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting for information about ADF programming Invalid ADF rule is detected See Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting for information about ADF programming The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer Normal when scanning the Code 39 Buffering Clear Buffer bar code or upon attempt to transmit an empty Code 39 buffer Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Digital Scanner emits a low high low high beep sequence while it is being programmed Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Possible Causes Out of ADF parameter storage space Possible Solutions Erase all rules and re program with shorter rules Digital Scanner emits long low long high beeps Input error incorrect bar
231. ing Pattern 2 Disable Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern 0 Enable Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF 3 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 35 Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter 590 Select Enable Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar code capture Disable Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off or Enable Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF to project the aiming pattern when the digital scanner detects a 2D bar code This parameter does not apply to Snapshot Mode See Modes of Operation on page 5 15 lt J NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5 28 enabled the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the Decode Aim ing Pattern is disabled Enable Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern 1 Disable Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern 0 Enable Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF 2 5 36 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Presentation Mode Field of View Parameter 609 In presentation mode by default the digital scanner searches the larger area of the aiming pattern Full Field of View To search for a bar code in a smaller region around the aiming pattern s center cross in order to speed search time select Small Field of View or Medi
232. ing time is required Warm temperature and dry humidity requires less drying time 3 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Battery Information Rechargeable battery packs are designed and constructed to the highest standards within the industry However there are limitations to how long a battery can operate or be stored before needing replacement Many factors affect the life of a battery pack such as heat cold customer usage profiles age and severe drops When batteries are stored over a year battery cell manufacturers advise that some irreversible deterioration in overall battery quality may occur To minimize this loss they recommend storing batteries half charged in a dry cool place between 41 F and 77 F 5 C and 25 C the cooler the better and removed from the equipment to prevent the loss of capacity Batteries should be charged to half capacity at least once a year If an electrolyte leakage is observed avoid any contact with the affected area and properly dispose of the battery Replace the battery when a significant loss of run time is detected Batteries must be charged within the 32 F to 104 F 0 C to 40 C temperature range The standard warranty period for all Motorola Solutions batteries is 30 days regardless if the battery was purchased separately or included as part of the digital scanner Troubleshooting Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Problem Battery Possible Causes Possible Solutions D
233. ions License Endorsements 17 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Height Feet and or Inches Height Centimeters Weight Pounds Weight Kilograms Eye Color Hair Color License Expiration Date Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 11 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Birth Date Gender License Issue Date License Issue State Social Security Number Permit Class Permit Expiration Date 17 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Permit ID Number Permit Issue Date Permit Restrictions Permit Endorsements AKA Social Security Name AKA Full Name AKA Last Name AKA First Name Drivers License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 13 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued AKA Middle Name Initial AKA Name Suffix AKA Name Prefix AKA Birth Date Issue Timestamp Number of Duplicates Medical Codes 17 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Organ Donor Nonresident Customer ID Weight Range Document Discriminator Country Federal Commission Codes Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL
234. iquid on the cradle Wipe the cradle using the same approved cleansers as the Digital Scanner CAUTION Avoid using cleansers directly on the digital scanner battery door contacts and cradle contacts Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to gently clean contacts Known Harmful Ingredients The following chemicals are known to damage the plastics on Motorola scanners cradles and should not come in contact with the device e Ammonia solutions e Compounds of amines or ammonia e Acetone e Ketones e Ethers e Aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons e Aqueous or alcoholic alkaline solutions e Ethanolamine e Toluene Trichloroethylene e Benzene e Carbolic acid e TB lysoform IMPORTANT Some hand sanitizers commonly used in the healthcare environment may contain the An harmful ingredients listed above such as ethanolamine Hands must be completely dry before handling the Motorola DS6878 HC digital scanner to prevent inadvertent contamination with known harmful ingredients and damage to the plastics Daily Cleaning and Disinfecting Following are the cleaning and disinfecting instructions for environments that require daily or more frequent cleaning to prevent the spread of germs including healthcare workers who need to disinfect their scanner after each patient visit and retail and other shift workers who share devices 1 Dampen a soft cloth with one of the approved cleaning agents listed above or use pre moistened wipes 2
235. ist in capturing delimiting and formatting scanned OCR data Literal String and Et Use either of these delimiting characters surrounding characters from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting to define a literal string within a template that must be present in scanned OCR data There are two characters used to delimit required literal strings if one of the delimiter characters is present in the desired literal string use the other delimiter Template Valid data Invalid data 35 BC 35 BC AB 22 OCR Programming 14 21 New Line E To create a template of multiple lines add E between the template of each single line E Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 999EAAAA 321 987 XYZW BCAD ZXYW 12 String Extract C This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data The string extract is structured as follows Cc CbPe Where e cis the string extract operator e bis the string begin delimiter e P is the category one or more numeric or alpha characters describing the string representation e eis the string end delimiter Values for b and e can be any scannable character They are included in the output stream Template Incoming data Output C gt A gt XQ3 gt ABCDE gt gt ABCDE gt gt ATHRUZ gt 123 gt ATHRUZ gt 1ABCZXYZ No Output 14 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Ignore to End of Field D This operat
236. isted under Beeper Tone on page 5 8 The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters require scanning several bar codes See these parameter descriptions for this procedure Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter User Preferences Miscellaneous Option Parameter Defaults Table lists the defaults for preferences parameters To change the default values e Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 e Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan configuration program see 123Scan2 on page 13 1 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 5 1 User Preferences Default Parameters Parameter Se Default stl tole User Preferences Set Default Parameter Set Defaults 5 5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning 236 Enable 5 6 Beep After Good Decode 56 Enable 5 6 Suppress Power Up Beeps 721 Do Not Suppress 5 7 Beeper Tone 145 Medium 5 8 Beeper Volume 140 High 5 9 Beeper Duration 628 Medium 5 10 Beep on Insertion 288 Enable 5 10 Decode Pager Motor 613 Disable 5 11 Decode Pager Motor Duration 626 15
237. kee 7 15 country keyboard types 7 8 device type 7 5 7 6 emulate keypad 7 12 function key mapping 7 14 keyboard FN 1sub 7 13 keystroke delay 0000 00a 7 10 optional parameters 5 7 16 polling interval 7 17 7 18 quick emulation 7 13 Index 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide simulated caps lock 7 15 SNAPI handshaking 7 7 static CDC wars pce wend yee ee ea AT Me e 7 14 unknown characters 7 11 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 15 65 variable PIN code 4 30 wand emulation code 39 full ASCII 11 6 convert all bar codes to code 39 11 6 h st e 2 05 paesad arerdaddaagaae 11 4 leading margin quiet zone 11 4 DOHIN acne cada eh S 11 5 unknown characters 11 5 wi fi friendly channel exclusion 4 8 wi fi friendly mode 0 00 eee eee 4 8 batch mode stored data 5 15 battery e H lee ole WEE 1 15 inserting removing 1 11 reconditioning 1 16 reconditioning barcode 1 15 shutting Off 1 15 battery reconditioning bar code 1 16 beeper definitions pairing A 2 TE Ee SEENEN we ad deed ans 4 3 Standard 2 1 WIFElESS egies eke ed ala ee ee a Bees 4 3 bluetooth 2 es 1 7 1 17 disc
238. l te IL BE 7 16 USB Polling Interval ME 7 17 ASCII Character Set for USB sissvcantercnnncsassecacimmnarncrants EES aa ANNEN NKA Eia 7 19 Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface ue e e NEE 8 1 Connecting an RS 232 PVG E 8 2 RS 232 Parameter Defaults ccc ccccccccceececeeeeceeeeeueeeeseeeeeuseeeueeeeeueeeaueeeeueeeeeceeeeueeeueeeeaeeusenaes 8 3 RS 232 Host Parameters seess EES 8 4 RS 292 HAOSU EE 8 6 Baud EE 8 8 PAN E 8 9 Data Bits ASCII Format E 8 9 xX DS6878 Product Reference Guide Check Receive Emors sccesiiciiviecedvncenvie cavaccasvecuatiyeassycdersvenidevuen sudan E a EEE EAE EEEa 8 10 Hardware Handshaking EE 8 10 Software Handshaking BEE 8 12 Host Serial Response Time out cceeeeeeseeeceeeneeaaeeaaeeaaeeaeeaaeeaaeeaaecaaeeaeceaeceaeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseees 8 14 EAR 8 15 Bepon EEN 8 15 Intercharacter eebe EES 8 16 Nixdorf Beep LED Options cece cece cece cece cece cee eeeeteee eee eee cea si E eae eeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeteees 8 17 Ignore Unknown Characters enk egdEaedabedregdege ene egene ebe ee enee eieiei 8 17 ASCII Character Set for RG 232 8 18 Chapter 9 Keyboard Wedge Interface erte ele E 9 1 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface ccccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeee ce eeeeeeeseneceeeeeereeeseeceeseceseeenneses 9 2 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults 0 cccccececccceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesaeenceeeeenanenseneeseneeeeneneeens 9 3 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters aextetest carerei
239. latch between the loop guides Loop Guides Screw Container Figure 1 15 Attaching Lanyard 3 Close the battery door latch 4 Tighten the screw Introduction This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions scanning techniques general instructions and tips about scanning and decode ranges Beeper Definitions The digital scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner For additional beeper definitions see Table 2 1 Standard Beeper Definitions Standard Use Low medium high beeps Power up High beep A bar code symbol was decoded if decode beeper is enabled Four long low beeps 1 A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting 2 When communicating with a cradle the cradle acknowledges receipt of data If the acknowledgment is not received this transmission error beep sequence sounds Data may still have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Four short beeps Low battery warning Five low long beeps Conversion or format error 2 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 2 1 Standard Beeper Definitions Continued Beeper Sequence Low beep Indication
240. lected check digit option does not take effect until you set OCR Check Digit Validation To choose the Check Digit Modulus such as 10 for modulo 10 scan the following bar code then scan a three digit number from 001 to 099 representing the check digit using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting The default is 1 OCR Check Digit 14 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Check Digit Multiplier Parameter 700 This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for the character positions For check digit validation each character in scanned data has an equivalent weight used in the check digit calculation DS6878 OCR ships with the following weight equivalents 0 0 A 10 K 20 U 30 1 B 11 L 21 V 31 2 2 C 12 M 22 W 32 3 3 D 13 N 23 X 33 4 4 E 14 O 24 Y 34 5 5 F 15 P 25 Z 35 6 6 G 16 Q 26 Space 0 7 7 H 17 R 27 8 8 1 18 S 28 9 9 J 19 T 29 All other characters are equivalent to one 1 You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default 121212121212 default 123456789A for ISBN Product Add Right to Left See OCR Check Digit Validation on page 14 27 For example ISBN 0 2 0 1 1 8 3 9 9 4 Multiplier 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 0 18 0 7 6 40 12 27 18 4 Product add O 18 0 7 6 40 12 27 18 4 132 ISBN uses modulo 11 for its check digit In this case 132 is divisible by 11 so it passes the check digit T
241. llielldlddlhdly GOLABCDLABSMX C 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numeric Bar Codes For parameters requiring specific numeric values scan the appropriately numbered bar code s 0 1 2 3 D 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide HU 4 WAT 5 HH 6 OI 7 OM 8 9 Numeric Bar Codes D 3 Cancel To correct an error or change a selection scan the bar code below Cancel 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard Space E 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued I Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 3 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued D A E 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued lt gt Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 5 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued A E 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued J NOTE The bar codes that follow should not be confused with those on the numeric keypad 0 1 2 3 4 5 Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 7 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued MI 6 OI 7 OI 8 OT 9 Au End of Message Cancel E 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Ou A Out B MMI Cc Ou D OU
242. long high beeps Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered Long low long high long low long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device Code 39 Buffering High low beeps New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer Three long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full High low high beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased Low high low beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer Low high beeps A successful transmission of buffered data Scanning 2 3 Table 2 1 Standard Beeper Definitions Continued Beeper Sequence Indication Host Specific USB only Four high beeps Digital scanner has not completed initialization Wait several seconds and scan again Digital scanner gives a power up beep after Communication with the bus must be established before the digital scanning a USB Device Type scanner can operate at the highest power level This power up beep occurs more than once The USB bus may put the digital scanner in a state where power to the digital scanner is cycled on and off more than once This is normal and usually happens when the host PC cold boots RS 232 only High beep A lt BEL gt character is received and Beep on lt BEL gt is enabled Point to Point mode only LED Definitions In addition to beeper sequences the digital scanner communicates
243. lts ccccceeeesseceeeeeeeeeeeseeceeseseeseesesaeaneceeeeenenteneeneees 6 2 Imaging Preferences 2 sic20 ce eacsseatiecciongeashc8eareSeuiraggancuadareanabannussacdeacanel ueadleseedetacdesdvaadousesenoaasateetahest 6 4 Operational MOde S iesene r tis assent an EEN Peale dead ean eave 6 4 Image Capture lllumination WEEN 6 5 Gain Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode ccccccee cece cece cence eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 6 Snapshot Mode Timeout ce cece cece cece cece eee e eect eee eee ee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegseeeseeeseesseeaeees 6 7 Snapshot Aiming Pattern BEE 6 7 Image Cropping EE 6 7 Crop to Pixel Addresses cccccecccecccecceeeeeee eee eae eae eaaeaaaeeaaaeaaaeaaeaeseesseeseeceseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseensanes 6 8 Image Size Number of Pixels eetegegteggeeb eebe Gite n es eege 6 9 Image Brightness Target White ciccccidainstcancctarin tiaidbcosininanassanee sarin ie esde ge EE Gebieder ege 6 10 Table of Contents ix JPEG mage OptONS eben degt Age seenedealacvealuaud jbtoeteccatiseabacereceeeaton 6 10 JPEG Target E 6 11 JPEG Quality and Size ER 6 11 REENEN akna aadA 6 12 Image File Format Selector geg tee eet ee et eege ee EEGEN Ae 6 13 Image Ee E 6 14 BS Or EE 6 15 Signature Capt r meee Ree ee eee te mre E re ee ee AE eer rere ee E eee 6 16 Signature Capture File Format Selector c ccccccceseseeeeeeeeeeeesteesaeneseeeeneeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 17 Signa
244. mpler expressions then add to it until you discover the source of the error For example try the simplest expression see Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions and make sure you can scan a single bar code If so extend the expression by adding a second bar code specifying a region or specifying the code type Verify that the digital scanner can decode this new expression Continue adding to the expression until it fails to decode as expected indicating the source of the error e Review Defining Multicode Expression Notes on page 5 39 for additional hints 5 46 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions The simplest multicode expression is e One bar code of any type anywhere in the image e To program this use MultiCode Expression 01 End Of Message Another simple multicode expression is e One Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image e To program this use MultiCode Expression 01 C 02 00 08 End Of Message User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 47 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters Transmit Code ID Character Parameter 45 A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code This is useful when decoding more than one code type In addition to any single character prefix already selected the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol Select no Code ID character a Symbol Code ID character or an AIM Code ID
245. munication parameters If you wish to change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Radio Communications Parameters section beginning on page 4 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 4 1 Radio Communication Default Parameters Parameter Default en Bluetooth Host Host Type Cradle Host 4 4 Discoverable Mode General 4 7 Wi Fi Friendly Mode Disable 4 8 Wi Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion Use All Channels 4 8 Apple iOS HID Feature Disable 4 10 Android HID Feature Disable 4 10 Country Keyboard Types Country Code North American 4 11 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay 0 msec 4 13 CAPS Lock Override Disable 4 13 Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 4 14 Emulate Keypad Disable 4 14 Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 4 15 Function Key Mapping Disable 4 15 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 4 16 Convert Case No Case Conversion 4 16 Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable 4 18 Reconnect Attempt Interval 30 sec 4 19 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation On Bar Code Data 4 20 HID Slave Mode Modes of Operation Point to Point Multipoint to Point Point to Point 4 21 Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only Enable 4 22 Pairing Modes Unlocked 4 23 Pairing on Contacts Enable 4 24 Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min 4 26 Authentication Disable 4 29 Radio Communications 4 3
246. n This chapter provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication between digital scanners cradles and hosts The chapter also includes the parameters necessary to configure the digital scanner The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the also see for all host device and miscellaneous digital scanner defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down If not using a Synapse or USB cable with the cradle select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connected to a new host To return all features to default values scan a default bar code in Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks Indicates Default Enable Pair on Contacts Feature Option Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter 4 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications Parameter Defaults Table 4 1 lists the defaults for radio com
247. n is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 7 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continued Parameter Se Default nave Scanner Emulation Beep Style N A Beep on Successful 12 4 Transmit Parameter Pass Through N A Parameter Process and 12 5 Pass Through Convert Newer Code Types N A Convert Newer Code 12 6 Types Module Width N A 20 us 12 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 N A Do Not Convert Bar 12 7 Codes to Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion N A Disable 12 7 Transmission Timeout N A 3 sec 12 8 Ignore Unknown Characters N A Ignore Unknown 12 9 Characters Leading Margin N A 2ms 12 9 Check for Decode LED N A Check for Decode LED 12 10 123Scan Configuration Tool 123Scan Configuration N A None 13 1 OCR Programming Parameters OCR A 680 Disable 14 3 OCR A Variant 684 Full ASCII 14 3 OCR B 681 Disable 14 5 OCR B Variant 685 Full ASCII 14 6 MICR E13B 682 Disable 14 9 US Currency 683 Disable 14 10 OCR Orientation 687 0 14 10 OCR Lines 691 1 14 12 OCR Minimum Characters 689 3 14 12 OCR Maximum Characters 690 100 14 13 OCR Security Level 554 80 14 13 OCR Subset 686 Selected font variant 14 14 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Paramete
248. nd Send Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 25 Keyboard Characters continued VATION Send A VW Send 0 ut Send amp ID Send IA Send A0 WI Send 008 Wl Send 17 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send Send 0 Send Send Send Send 1 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 27 Keyboard Characters continued VATA Send 2 A0 id Send 3 00 Send A IDN A Send 5 IA Send 6 VAT Send 7 NN Send 8 17 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send lt Send gt Send 9 Send Send Send Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 29 Keyboard Characters continued IAM Send UA Send A NA Send B IDN Send C VT Send D IDN Send E VTA Send F 17 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send H Send J Send L
249. ne or more literal string characters see Literal String and on page 14 20 that trigger the start of output e tis one or more template characters 14 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator Template Incoming data Output P0A9999 BPN3456 3456 PN1234 1234 5341 5341 Template Incoming data Output PO PN 9999 PN3456 3456 5341 5341 PNPN7654 7654 Repeat Previous R This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times allowing the capture of variable length scanned data The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required R digits Template Incoming data Output AA9R AB3 AB3 PN12345 PN12345 32RM52700 No output Scroll Until Match S S This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template Template Incoming data Output S99999 AB3 No Output PN12345 12345 32RM52700 52700 OCR Programming 14 25 Multiple Templates This feature sets up multiple templates for OCR decoding To do this follow the procedure described in OCR Template on page 14 16 scan the OCR Template bar code then bar codes corresponding to numbers and letters to form the template expression then End of Message for each template in the multiple template string using a capital letter X as a separator between the templates For example set the
250. neiedunsovelaremaran 1 10 Lost Connection t OSE 2 iccscsaccotccdesneraticenanid eraumebaueaaraneeceh eenegen 1 10 Mounting the Cradle eenegen 1 10 Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery cceeeesceeccceeeeeeneeseeeeeeeneeeeneneneaaeeeeeeeaeaeaneneeseeeeeneeeeaes 1 11 Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle 2020xeusgeersbechei tege geed eege 1 12 Inserting Digital Scanner in the CRO078 S CRO008 S Cradle 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeee 1 12 Inserting Removing Digital Scanner in the CROO78 P Cradle cccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 1 13 Charging the Digital Scanner Battery cceeceeeeeeseecceeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeneneeeesesseeneeneneeeee 1 15 Charging LED EE 1 15 vi DS6878 Product Reference Guide Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery ssvssicccavsncascercavaccetsecsadavsactnneeteccassssasedbeateaubicweaaveneatdeveneneuave 1 15 Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery ccceeeeseecceeeeeeeeesseeeeneeeeeeeeeenseseeseeeeseeneeeeeeeees 1 16 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions sisccisieitasticnstacadeazcannctioteetarniaadscesraeiannescetablentaduatanuuictons 1 16 Radio COMMUNICATIONS sisitemi aAa a Aa Aaaa 1 17 Configuring the Digital Scanner sess cssecsiapteoilenst tetesdadcslbeaieceentbetesaeldetalsasngaeghicnatlntct datdalbeantbeedataten 1 17 HEES 1 17 Ee Cl E 1 17 Chapter 2 Scanning IntrodUCtOn EE 2 1 Beeper Detinitions sicisvieinesudssancs
251. ng Disable Function Key Mapping Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 11 FN1 Substitution When enabled the digital scanner replaces FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a keystroke chosen by the user see ENT Substitution Values on page 5 50 Enable FN1 Substitution Disable FN1 Substitution Send Make and Break When enabled the scan codes for releasing a key are not sent Send Make and Break Scan Codes Send Make Scan Code Only 9 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Maps Refer to the following keyboard map for prefix suffix keystroke parameters To program the prefix suffix values see the bar codes on page 5 48 Va P 2266 S668 S68 sae o BEE E OHE Aee GCH Li eee COO L LUC E LI es ee ee Je GLC L JO WE EI Xe Wd Tm Figure 9 2 BM PS2 Type Keyboard Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 13 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge V NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an AS
252. ng beeps 12 4 high long beeps 13 5 high long beeps 14 1 low long beep 15 2 low long beeps 16 3 low long beeps 17 4 low long beeps 18 5 low long beeps 19 Fast warble beep 20 Slow warble beep 21 High low beep 22 Low high beep 23 High low high beep 24 H 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Low high low beep 25 High high low low beep 26 Green LED off 42 Green LED on 43 Red LED on 47 Red LED off 48 Parameter Defaults Attribute 6001 This attribute restores all parameters to their factory defaults Type X Size Bytes N A User Mode Access W Values 0 Restore Defaults 1 Restore Factory Defaults 2 Write Custom Defaults Beep on Next Bootup Attribute 6003 This attribute configures enables or disables beep on next boot up of scanner Type X Size Bytes N A User Mode Access W Values 0 Disable beep on next bootup 1 Enable beep on next bootup Reboot Attribute 6004 This attribute initiates a device reboot Type X Size Bytes N A User Mode Access W Values N A Host Trigger Session Attribute 6005 This attribute triggers a decode session similar to manually depressing the scanner trigger button Type X Size Bytes N A User Mode Access W Values 1 Start Host Trigger Session 0 Stop Host Trigger Session Non Parameter AttributesH 5 Firmware Version Attribute 20004 The scanner s operating system version For example NBRFMAAC or PAAAABS00 007 R03D0 Type S Size Bytes Variable U
253. ng pages for further details Select Do Not Buffer Code 39 to transmit all decoded Code 39 symbols immediately without storing them in the buffer Symbologies 15 33 Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store continued This feature affects Code 39 only If selecting Buffer Code 39 we recommend configuring the digital scanner to decode Code 39 symbology only Buffer Code 39 Enable 1 Do Not Buffer Code 39 Disable 0 While there is data in the transmission buffer you cannot select Do Not Buffer Code 39 The buffer holds 200 bytes of information To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer first force the buffer transmission see Transmit Buffer on page 15 34 or clear the buffer Buffer Data To buffer data enable Code 39 buffering and scan a Code 39 symbol with a space immediately following the start pattern e Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer the digital scanner issues a low high beep to indicate successful decode and buffering For overflow conditions see Overfilling Transmission Buffer on page 15 34 e The digital scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer e No transmission occurs Clear Transmission Buffer To clear the transmission buffer scan the Clear Buffer bar code below which contains only a start character a dash minus
254. ning Motorola recommends enabling this when the OCR string is longer than 20 characters and for applications with busy backgrounds such as passport check or VISA reading Enable OCR Bright Illumination 1 Disable OCR Bright Illumination 0 J NOTE Enabling OCR Bright Illumination causes the aiming pattern to blink due to the lower frame rate setting 14 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Template Parameter 547 This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format Carefully constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors To set or modify the OCR decode template scan the OCR Template bar code then bar codes corresponding to numbers and letters on the following pages to form the template expression Then scan End of Message in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting The default is 54R which accepts any character OCR strings OCR Template End of Message Required Digit 9 9 Only a numeric character is allowed in this position Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99999 12987 30517 123AB Required Alpha A Only an alpha character is allowed in this position A Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAA ABC WXY 12F OCR Programming 14 17 Requi
255. ning and to indicate error conditions Beep After Good Decode Enable 1 Do Not Beep After Good Decode Disable 0 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 7 Suppress Power Up Beeps Parameter 721 Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to suppress digital scanner beeps upon power up Do Not Suppress Power Up Beeps 0 Suppress Power Up Beeps 1 5 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Beeper Tone Parameter 145 To select a decode beep frequency tone scan one of the following bar codes To disable the Beeper Tone scan the Off parameter Off 3 Low Tone 2 e Medium Tone 1 High Tone 0 Medium to High Tone 2 tone 4 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 9 Beeper Volume Parameter 140 To select a beeper volume scan the Low Volume Medium Volume or High Volume bar code Low Volume 2 Medium Volume 1 High Volume 0 5 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Beeper Duration Parameter 628
256. nique to each cradle 2 Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes 3 When the digital scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication For more information see Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 17 Radio Communications 4 23 Pairing Modes When operating with the cradle two modes of pairing are supported e Locked Pairing Mode When a cradle is paired connected to the digital scanner or up to three digital scanners for the CR0078 S and up to seven digital scanners for the CR0078 P in Multipoint to Point mode any attempt to connect a different digital scanner by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled page 4 24 is rejected The currently connected digital scanner s maintain connection In this mode you must set a Connection Maintenance Interval on page 4 26 e Unlocked Pairing Mode Pair connect a new digital scanner to a cradle at any time by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled This unpairs the previous digital scanner from the cradle Point to Point mode only To set the cradle pairing mode scan the appropriate bar code below Unlocked Pairing Mode
257. nner When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed Disable Enable Ignore Bar Code Configuration The host has the ability to enable disable code types When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed Disable Enable USB Interface 7 17 USB Polling Interval Scan a bar code below to set the polling interval The polling interval determines the rate at which data can be sent between the scanner and host computer A lower number indicates a faster data rate J NOTE Wien changing USB Device Types the cradle automatically restarts The digital scanner issues a disconnect reconnect beep sequence 0 IMPORTANT Ensure your host machine can handle the selected data rate 1 msec 2 msec 3msec 4 msec 7 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Polling Interval continued UA 5 msec UMA 6 msec UNM N 7 msec LE 8 msec UA 9 msec USB Interface 7 19 ASCII Character Set for USB Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encod
258. no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character then the digital scanner issues an error beep Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Keystroke Delay This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data No Delay Medium Delay 20 msec Long Delay 40 msec 9 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Intra Keystroke Delay When enabled an additional delay is inserted between each emulated key depression and release This sets the Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well Enable Intra Keystroke Delay Disable Intra Keystroke Delay Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes on page 9 5 ina Microsoft operating system environment Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 9
259. nown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Convert Error on Unknown Characters is selected bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the decoder and a convert error beep sounds Ignore Unknown Characters Convert Error On Unknown Characters Leading Margin Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration 1 ms Leading Margin 2 ms Leading Margin 3 ms Leading Margin 12 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Leading Margin continued 5 ms Leading Margin 10 ms Leading Margin Check For Decode LED The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host that it successfully decoded the transmitted bar code Some decoders however do not assert the Decode signal In this case the digital scanner emits transmit error beeps to indicate that the bar code was not successfully transmitted Scan the Ignore Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit Error beeps Check For Decode LED Ignore Decode LED Introduction 123Scan is an easy to use PC based software tool that enables rapid and easy customized setup of Motorola scanners 123Scan uses a wizard tool to guide users through a streamlined set up process Settings are saved ina configura
260. nside the bar code pattern is considered the signature capture area See Appendix G Signature Capture Code for more information Output File Format Decoding a signature capture bar code de skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP JPEG or TIFF file format The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image File Descriptor Output Format Signature Type 1 SE Size Signature Image 1 byte byte BIG Endian JPEG 1 1 8 0x00000400 0x00010203 BMP 3 TIFF 4 To enable or disable Signature Capture scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Signature Capture 1 Disable Signature Capture 0 Imaging Preferences 6 17 Signature Capture File Format Selector Parameter 313 Select a signature file format appropriate for the system BMP TIFF or JPEG The digital scanner stores captured signatures in the selected format BMP Signature Format 3 JPEG Signature Format 1 TIFF Signature Format 4 6 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel Parameter 314 Select the number of significant bits per pixel BPP to use when capturing a signature Select 1 BPP for a black and white image 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of
261. nuous Bar Code Read to control the time the scanner is inactive between decoding different symbols It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 1 to 9 9 seconds The default is 0 2 seconds To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval in 0 1 second increments Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 5 34 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Fuzzy 1D Processing Parameter 514 This option is enabled by default to optimize decode performance on 1D bar codes including damaged and poor quality symbols Disable this only if you experience time delays when decoding 2D bar codes or in detecting a no decode Enable Fuzzy 1D Processing 1 Disable Fuzzy 1D Processing 0 Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter 306 Select Enable Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar code capture Disable Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off or Enable Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF to project the aiming pattern when the digital scanner detects a 2D bar code V NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5 28 enabled the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the hand held Decode Aiming Pattern is disabled Enable Hand held Decode Aim
262. o scan 1 Ensure all connections are secure see appropriate host chapter 2 Present the bar code in the digital scanner field of view Figure 2 2 Scanning 3 Upon successful decode the digital scanner beeps and the LED flashes green For more information about beeper and LED definitions see Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 Aiming When scanning the digital scanner projects a red laser aiming pattern which allows positioning the bar code within its field of view See Decode Ranges on page 2 8 for the proper distance to achieve between the digital scanner and a bar code Figure 2 3 Imager Aiming Pattern Scanning 2 7 To scan a bar code center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern Ensure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the cross pattern 1D bar code 2D bar code ui RRA La Ba Figure 2 4 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Pattern Aiming Pattern The digital scanner can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered The top examples in Figure 2 5 show acceptable aiming options while the bottom examples can not be decoded AW tL gt ui 2 wm Be Figure 2 5 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming 2 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode Ranges Table 2 6 DS6878 SR DS6878 HC DS6878 DL Decode Ranges Typical Working Ranges Symbol Density Bar Code Type Far 5 mil Code 39 0
263. o set the check digit multiplier scan the following bar code then scan numbers and letters to form the multiplier string from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting Then scan End of Message in the Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting OCR Check Digit Multiplier OCR Programming 14 27 OCR Check Digit Validation Parameter 694 Use OCR Check Digit Validation to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme The following is a list of options None No check digit validation indicating no check digit is applied This is the default No Check Digit 0 Product Add Left to Right Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier and the sum of these products is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6 Product 1 6 6 16 25 36 Product add 1 6 6 16 25 36 90 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 the remainder is zero Product Add Left to Right 3
264. o set the crop to pixel address scan each pixel address bar code below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value Leading zeros are required For example to crop the top pixel address to 3 scan 0 0 3 See Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes for numeric bar codes NOTE The digital scanner has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels Setting the cropping area to less than 4 pixels vV after resolution adjustment see Image Size Number of Pixels on page 6 9 transfers the entire image Top Pixel Address 0 479 Decimal Left Pixel Address 0 751 Decimal Bottom Pixel Address 0 479 Decimal Right Pixel Address 0 751 Decimal Imaging Preferences 6 9 Image Size Number of Pixels Parameter 302 This option alters image resolution before compression Multiple pixels are combined to one pixel resulting in a smaller image containing the original content with reduced resolution Select one of the following values pee ek Uncropped Image Size Full 752 x 480 1 2 376 x 240 1 4 180 x 120 Full Resolution 0 1 2 Resolution 1 1 4 Resolution 3 6 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Image Brightness Target White Parameter 390 Type Byte Range 1 240 This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot and
265. ogrammable 1 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or the user defined prefix set using User Programmable Supplementals on page 15 13 e Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 and 2 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or one of the two user defined prefixes set using User Programmable Supplementals on page 15 13 NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters Symbologies 15 11 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals continued Decode UPC EAN JAN Only With Supplementals 1 ignore Supplementals 0 Autodiscriminate UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 2 Enable 378 379 Supplemental Mode 4 Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode 5 Enable 977 Supplemental Mode 7 15 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals continued Enable 414 419 434 439 Supplemental Mode 6 Enable 491 Supplemental Mode 8 Enable Smart Supplemental Mode 3 Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 9 Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 and 2 10 Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 11 Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 and 2 12 Symbologies 15 13 User Programmable Supplementals Supplemental 1 Parameter 579 Supplemental 2 Parameter 580 If you selected a Supplemental User Programmable option from Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 15
266. on Synapse allows for connectivity to all of the above plus many non standard interfaces User Environment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature Charging Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications 3 11 Table 3 3 Technical Specifications CROO78 S CRO0008 Cradle Continued Item Description Accessories Mounting Options Desktop mount on a wall computer work station or medical cart Power Supplies Power supplies are available for applications that do not supply power over host cable Table 3 4 Technical Specifications CRO078 P Cradle Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 5 4 in L x 4in W x 3 6 in H Weight Approximately 7 9 oz Voltage amp Current Charging Cradle VoltageCurrent 12 VDC 60mA no scanner 12 VDC 160mA idle scanner 12 VDC 335 mA charging scanner Color Twilight Black Healthcare White Power Requirements 12 10 VDC Performance Characteristics Interfaces Supported Features on board Multiple Interface with RS 232C Standard Nixdorf ICL amp CROO78 P only Fujitsu IBM 468x 469x Keyboard Wedge USB Standard IBM SurePOS Macintosh SNAPI 123Scan Remote Digital Scanne
267. ong low beep after a bar code is decoded Conversion or format error was detected The digital scanner s conversion parameters are not properly configured Ensure the digital scanner s conversion parameters are properly configured Conversion or format error was detected An ADF rule was set up with characters that can t be sent for the host selected Change the ADF rule or change to a host that can support the ADF rule Conversion or format error was detected A bar code was scanned with characters that can t be sent for that host Change the bar code or change to a host that can support the bar code Host Displays Host displays scanned data incorrectly Digital Scanner is not programmed to work with the host Ensure the proper host is selected Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code For RS 232 ensure the digital scanner s communication parameters match the host s settings For a USB Keyboard HID or Keyboard Wedge configuration ensure the system is programmed for the correct keyboard type and language and turn off the CAPS LOCK key Ensure editing options e g ADF UPC E to UPC A Conversion are properly programmed Check the digital scanner s host type parameters or editing options ES 3 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Trigger
268. onnect event 2 2 3 5 4 3 keyboard emulation 4 4 secure simple pairing IO capability 4 32 SECUN 3204s eked ae ean eedda bere bedaas 4 29 Dullets 2 22545 AE dee EE EEN add xix C cables installing 00 22 20 e ee eaee 1 8 1 9 character set 7 19 8 18 9 13 F 1 Charging 4 4 624i aki seidtuSidveiendd Mae dete 1 15 RN 1 15 2 3 Vid USB a ices opin een oe ON SM ae ee ee 1 9 codabar bar codes CESI editing 15 49 codabar 15 47 lengis sa avd era San A EEN Oe 15 47 NOTIS editing 15 49 start and stop characters 15 50 code 11 bar codes CODE TT cia tee den a E ees ege dE 15 37 EL EE 15 37 code 128 bar codes code 128 anana eee 15 23 emulation 15 75 GS 1 128 ISBT 128 EEN 15 25 ISBT concatenation 15 26 15 27 ISBT concatenation redundancy 15 27 ins EE 15 23 code 39 bar codes buffering 15 32 15 33 check digit verification 15 31 COJE ZI ei ace ta hea eae fe heed 15 28 TUILASCI it wiht bad aad dee ANE Ee 15 32 ne EE 15 30 transmit check dont 15 31 code 93 bar codes Code ENEE 15 35 ne EE 15 35 code ID character 5 47 code identifiers AIM code IDS g24 6 0 204 apetareudadeedion sa B 3 modifier characters e B 4 SYMDOI vice aan EE aes eh ee yeaa a eee B 1 composite bar codes composite CAR 15 71 composite CC 15 71 composite TLC30 15 72 UPC composite mode
269. ontinued Parameter se ial bea Default aves Low Power Mode 128 Enabled 5 20 Time Delay to Hand held Low Power Mode 146 100 msec 5 20 Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode 663 1 Minute 5 23 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode 662 1 Hour 5 26 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim 729 15 Sec 5 27 Picklist Mode 402 Disabled Always 5 28 Mobile Phone Display Mode 716 Disable 5 29 FIPS Security 736 Enabled 5 30 PDF Prioritization 719 Disable 5 31 PDF Prioritization Timeout 720 200 ms 5 31 Continuous Bar Code Read 649 Disable 5 32 Unique Bar Code Reporting 723 Disable 5 32 Decode Session Timeout 136 9 9 Sec 5 33 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 137 0 5 Sec 5 33 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 144 0 2 Sec 5 33 Fuzzy 1D Processing 514 Enable 5 34 Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern 306 Enable 5 34 Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern 590 Enable 5 35 Presentation Mode Field of View 609 Full 5 36 Decoding lllumination 298 Enable 5 37 Multicode Mode 677 Disable 5 37 Multicode Expression 661 1 5 38 Multicode Mode Concatenation 717 Disable 5 43 Multicode Concatenation Symbology 722 Concatenate as PDF417 5 44 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character 45 None 5 47 Prefix Value 99 105 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 48 Suffix 1 Value 98 104 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 48 Suffix 2 Value 100 106 Scan Data Transmission Format 235 Data as is 5 49 1Use
270. or a trigger pull lt J NOTE Digital scanner performance is not guaranteed in dim conditions Disable 0 1 Second 1 10 Seconds 10 1 Minute 17 5 Minutes 21 5 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode continued 15 Minutes 27 30 Minutes 29 45 Minutes 30 4 Hour 33 3 Hours 35 6 Hours 38 9 Hours 41 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 27 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim Parameter 729 This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains in auto aim before entering low power mode Disabled 0 5 secs 85 15 secs 11 30 secs 13 1 minute 17 5 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Picklist Mode Parameter 402 Picklist mode enables the digital scanner to decode only bar codes that are aligned under the laser crosshair Select one of the following picklist modes for the digital scanner Disabled Always Picklist mode is always disabled Enabled in Hand held Mode Picklist mode is enabled when the digital scanner is out of hands free mode and disabled when the digital scanner is in presentation mode Enabled in Hands free Mode Picklist mode is enabled when the digital scanner is in hands free mode only Enabled Always
271. or causes all characters after a template to be ignored Use this as the last character in a template expression Examples for the template 999D D Template Incoming data Output 999D 123 PED 123 357298 357 193 193 Skip Until P1 P This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected It can be used in two ways 1 Plet Where e P1 is the Skip Until operator e cis the type of character that triggers the start of output e tis one or more template characters PL S E Where e P1 is the Skip Until operator e s is one or more literal string characters see Literal String and on page 14 20 that trigger the start of output e tis one or more template characters OCR Programming 14 23 The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator and the first character in the template should accommodate this trigger Template Incoming data Output P1l PN AA9999 123PN9876 PN9876 PN1234 PN1234 X PN3592 PN3592 Skip Until Not P0 P This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is not matched in the output stream It can be used in two ways 0 POct Where e PO is the Skip Until Not operator e cis the type of character that triggers the start of output e tis one or more template characters PO S t Where e PO is the Skip Until Not operator e s is o
272. order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of these products except for the check digit s product is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit s product Example Scanned data numeric value is 122456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 2 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 10 8 12 10 6 Productadd 6 10 8 12 10 46 6 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6 Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder 5 OCR Programming 14 31 Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit s product is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit s product Example Scanned data numeric value is 122459 check
273. oth Technology Profile Support and pairing see Chapter 4 Radio Communications Configuring the Digital Scanner Use the bar codes in this manual or the 123Scan configuration program to configure the digital scanner See Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options and Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences for information about programming the digital scanner using bar code menus Also see each host specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type See Chapter 13 123Scan2 to configure the digital scanner using this configuration program Accessories The digital scanner and cradle accessories that are available separately include e Power supplies for applications that do not supply power over the host cable See each host interface chapter for set up information e Wall mount bracket for mounting the cradle vertically Refer to the CRO078 S CRO008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 135874 xx for a wall mounting template and installation instructions e Lanyard for wearing the digital scanner on a wrist Lanyard The lanyard attaches to the inside of the digital scanner battery door latch Figure 1 14 Attached Lanyard 1 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide To attach the lanyard 1 Open the battery door latch as described in Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 11 Do not remove the battery 2 Hook the loop of the lanyard around the screw container inside the battery door
274. paces to represent the second Input Output Ports I O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminal s memory Series 9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports UO Ports interface The connection between two devices defined by common physical characteristics signal characteristics and signal meanings Types of interfaces include RS 232 and PCMCIA K Key A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Also see Encryption and Decrypting L LASER Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation The laser is an intense light source Light from a laser is all the same frequency unlike the output of an incandescent bulb Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy density Laser Diode A gallium arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam This laser type is a compact source of coherent light Laser Scanner A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light LED Indicator A semiconductor diode LED Light Emitting Diode used as an indicator often in digital displays The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor s particular chemical composition Light Emitting Diode See LED Glossary 5 MIL 1 mil 1 thousandth of an inch MIN Mobile Identification Number The unique account number associated with
275. parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds To perform Scanner Emulation connect the cradle to a mobile computer or a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host IMPORTANT The CR0078 S cradle model STB4278 supports Scanner Emulation The CR0078 P cradle model A N CR0078 does not support Scanner Emulation Host Port Connector Figure 12 1 Scanner Emulation Connection To connect the Scanner Emulation interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the Cables to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle on page 1 8 2 Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the digital scanner port on the mobile computer or controller 3 Scan the Scanner Emulation host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 12 3 to enable the Scanner Emulation host interface 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 12 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only Conn
276. parator 220000 eee 17 19 driver s license gender format 17 17 driver s license parsing 17 2 17 3 send control characters 17 20 send keyboard characters 17 24 set defaults 17 17 Set up 17 4 17 5 17 6 EAN zero extend 15 20 EAN 732UAN 13 15 9 EAN 8 JAN 8 annann anaana 15 8 emulate keypad 4 14 enNCYPUON EE ER dE ed eyes a 4 31 flush macro buffer abort macro PDF entry 15 84 ENT substitution values 5 50 fuzzy 1D processing sunaa aaan 5 34 GS1 databar 20002055 15 67 GS1 databar expanded 15 68 GS1 databar limited 15 67 GS1 databar limited security level 15 69 GS1 databar 14 2 2 45 15 67 GS1A1A28 EE 15 25 hand held decode aiming pattern 5 35 HID caps lock override 4 13 HID country keyboard types 4 11 HID function key mapping 4 15 HID host parameters 4 10 HID ignore unknown characters 4 14 HID keyboard ENT substitution 4 15 HID keyboard keystroke delay 4 13 2 of 5 check digit verification 15 43 2 of 5 convert to EAN 13 15 44 2 of 5 transmit check digit 15 43 IBM 468X 469X convert unknown to code 39 10 5 ignore bar code configuration 10 6 ignore beep
277. pecified at this time Always transmit 0 GS1 DataBar 14 Family and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application Identifier 01 Note In GS1 128 emulation mode GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules e JC1 Example A GS1 DataBar 14 bar code 0110012345678902 is transmitted as Je00110012345678902 EAN UCC Native mode transmission Composites Note UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules GS1 DataBar GS1 128 0 Standard data packet 2D portion of UPE composite 1 Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character 2 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character The data packet does not support the ECI protocol 3 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character The data packet supports the ECI protocol GS1 128 emulation Note UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules Data packet is a GS1 128 symbol e data is preceded with JJC1 B 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type Option Value Option PDF417 0 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 Micro PDF417 symbology specifications Note When this option is transmitted the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECls have been invoked or whether data byte 92p c has been doubled in transmission 1 Reader set to follow the ECI protocol Extended Channel
278. performs like there s a serial connection The digital scanner initiates the connection to the remote device and is the Master Scan Serial Port Profile Master then scan the PAIR bar code for the remote device See Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 25 for information about creating a pairing bar code for a remote device e Serial Port Profile Slave Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support see page 4 6 The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection The digital scanner accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the Slave Scan Serial Port Profile Slave and wait for the incoming connection e Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support See page 4 6 for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and Master Slave definitions The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard The digital scanner accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the slave Scan Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave and wait for the incoming connection J NOTE 1 The digital scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile For detailed information and HID host parameters see H D Host Parameters on page 4 10 2 When the digital scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically t
279. plate Valid data Valid data Invalid data 55999 A 123 7456 A BCD Optional Digit 7 When this option appears in the template string the template accepts a numeric character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters 7 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99977 12345 789 789AB OCR Programming 14 19 Digit or Fill 8 The data validator accepts any numeric or fill character in this position 8 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 88899 12345 gt gt 789 lt lt 789 Alpha or Fill F F The data validator accepts any alpha or fill character in this position Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAAFF ABCXY LMN gt gt ABC lt 5 Required Space When this option appears in the template string the template accepts a space if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Space Template Valid data Invalid data 99 99 12 34 67891 14 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Optional Small Special When this option appears in the template string the data validator accepts a special character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Small special characters are and Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AA 99 MN 35 XY98 XYZ12 Other Template Operators These template operators ass
280. ply The CR0078 P can only receive power via an external power supply Lost Connection to Host If scanned data does not transmit to the cradle s host ensure that all cables are firmly inserted and the power supply is connected to an appropriate AC outlet If scanned data still does not transmit to the host reestablish a connection with the host 1 Disconnect the power supply from the cradle 2 Disconnect the host interface cable from the cradle 3 Wait three seconds Reconnect the host interface cable to the cradle Reconnect the power supply to the cradle if required o an P Reestablish pairing with the cradle by scanning the pairing bar code J NOTE The CR0078 S does not always require a power supply whereas the CRO008 S and CR0078 P always require a power supply Mounting the Cradle For information on mounting the CR0078 S cradle refer to the CRO078 S CRO008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide Getting Started 1 11 Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery The battery is installed in the cordless digital scanner by the factory and resides in a chamber in the digital scanner handle To replace the battery 1 Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the digital scanner then turn the screw counterclockwise to release the latch 2 Remove the latch 3 If a battery is already installed turn the digital scanner upright to slide the battery out Disconnect the battery connector clip Figure 1 9
281. program the digital scanner with ADF rules For information and programming bar codes for ADF refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide p n 72E 69680 xx 16 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction The DS6878 DL digital scanner is capable of parsing out information from standard US driver s licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators AAMVA compliant ID cards This is achieved using internally embedded algorithms where scanning bar codes activates algorithms internally embedded in the digital scanner to produce formatted data Use the formatted data for age verification credit card application information and more This chapter describes how to program the DS6878 DL digital scanner to read and use the data contained in the 2D bar codes on US driver s licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards 17 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide DL Parsing Parameter Defaults Table 17 1 lists the defaults for all DL Parsing parameters To change the default values scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts and miscellaneous default parameters Table 17 1 DL Parsing Default Parameters Parameter Default DL Parsing Parameters Drivers L
282. r Management User Environment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Charging Temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Accessories Power Supplies Power supply is required 3 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Cradle Signal Descriptions The signal descriptions in Table 3 5 apply to the connector on the digital scanner and are for reference only Table 3 5 Cradle Signal Pin outs Synapse cl eee 1 Reserved SynClock Reserved Reserved Reserved Jump to Pin 6 2 Power Power Power Power Power Power 3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 4 IBM_A Reserved TxD KeyClock DBP Reserved 5 Reserved Reserved RxD TermData CTS D 6 IBM_B SynData RTS KeyData RTS Jump to Pin 1 7 Reserved Reserved CTS TermClock Reserved D 8 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reseved 9 N A N A N A N A N A N A 10 N A N A N A N A N A N A Figure 3 1 illustrates the positions of the cradle pins Pin4 Pin3 Pin2 Pin1 Figure 3 1 Cradle Pin Assignments The signal descriptions in Table 3 6 apply to the connector from the digital scanner to the digital scanner cradle and are for reference only Table 3 6 Cradle Pin outs Pin Description 1 CRADLE_TXD 2 VCC 3 GND 4 CRADLE_RXD Introductio
283. r beep Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 This option applies only to the IBM hand held IBM table top and OPOS devices Scan a bar code below to enable or disable converting unknown bar code type data to Code 39 Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39 7 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Emulate Keypad When enabled all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad For example ASCII A would be sent as ALT make 0 6 5 ALT Break Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Enable this to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a leading zero For example ASCII A transmits as ALT MAKE 0 0 6 5 ALT BREAK Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
284. r selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type select whether to enable or disable status handshaking J NOTE The CR0078 P cradle is required for SNAPI Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking 7 7 7 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type This setting applies only to the USB Keyboard HID on device z NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets The digital scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences North American Standard USB Keyboard French Windows French Canadian Windows 2000 XP German Windows French Canadian Windows 95 98 French International USB Interface 7 9 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes continued Spanish Windows Swedish Windows Japanese Windows ASCII Italian Windows UK English Windows
285. r selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continued Parameter PETA Default Sl ble FN1 Substitution Values 103 109 Set 5 50 Transmit No Read Message 94 Disable 5 51 Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval 1118 Disable 5 52 Dump Scanner Parameters N A N A 5 53 Report Version 5 53 Imaging Preferences Operational Modes N A N A 6 4 Image Capture Illumination 361 Enable 6 5 Gain Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode 562 Autodetect 6 6 Snapshot Mode Timeout 323 0 30 seconds 6 7 Snapshot Aiming Pattern 300 Enable 6 7 Image Cropping 301 Disable 6 7 Crop to Pixel Addresses 315 0 top 6 8 316 0 left 317 479 bottom 318 751 right Image Size Number of Pixels 302 Full 6 9 Image Brightness Target White 390 180 6 10 JPEG Image Options 299 Quality 6 10 JPEG Target File Size 561 160 kB 6 11 JPEG Quality and Size Value 305 65 6 11 Image Enhancement 564 Off 0 6 12 Image File Format Selection 304 JPEG 6 13 Image Rotation 665 0 6 14 Bits per Pixel BPP 303 8 BPP 6 15 Signature Capture 93 Disable 6 16 Signature Capture Image File Format Selection 313 JPEG 6 17 Signature Capture Bits per Pixel BPP 314 8 BPP 6 18 Signature Capture Width 366 400 6 19 Signature Capture Height 367 100 6 19 Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421 65 6 19
286. ransmissions of data due to a NAK from the host an additional ENQ is not required XON XOFF An XOFF character turns the digital scanner transmission off until the digital scanner receives an XON character There are two situations for XON XOFF e XOFF is received before the digital scanner has data to send When the digital scanner has data to send it waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for an XON character before transmission If the XON is not received within this time the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data e XOFF is received during a transmission Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte When the digital scanner receives an XON character it sends the rest of the data message The digital scanner waits up to 30 seconds for the XON RS 232 Interface 8 13 Software Handshaking continued None ACK NAK NQ E ACK NAK with ENQ XON XOFF 8 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Host Serial Response Time out This parameter specifies how long the digital scanner waits for an ACK NAK ENQ XON or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred Kan Minimum 2 sec Low 2 5 sec Medium 5 sec High 7 5 sec Maximum 9 9 sec
287. re and Suppress 0 It is required that any character in this position including space or reject is suppressed from the output Template Incoming data Output 990AA 12QAB 12AB Optional Alphanumeric 1 1 When this option appears in the template string the data validator accepts an alphanumeric character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99991 1234A 12345 1234 lt Optional Alpha 2 When this option appears in the template string the data validator accepts an alpha character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters 2 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAAA2 ABCDE WXYZ ABCD6 Alpha or Digit 3 The data validator requires an alphanumeric character in this position to validate the incoming data 3 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 33333 12ABC WXY34 12AB lt 14 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Any Including Space amp Reject 4 The template accepts any character in this position including space and reject Rejects are represented as an underscore _ in the output This is a good selection for troubleshooting 4 Template Valid data Valid data 99499 12534 34_98 Any except Space amp Reject 5 5 The template accepts any character in this position except a space or reject Tem
288. riate bar code below Enable MSI 1 Disable MSI 0 Set Lengths for MSI Parameter L1 30 L2 31 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for MSI to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters scan MSI One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select MSI Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan MSI Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and
289. riate bar code from Port Address on page 10 4 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 10 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host The only required configuration is the port number Other digital scanner parameters are typically controlled by the IBM system IBM Interface 10 3 IBM 468X 469X Parameter Defaults Table 10 7 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 10 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 10 1 BM Host Default Parameters Parameter Default ere IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address None Selected 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 10 5 Ignore Beep Disable 10 6 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 10 6 10 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address This parameter sets the IBM 468X 469X port used J NOTE Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS 485 interface on th
290. ries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication For more information see Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 17 Radio Communications 4 5 Radio Communications Host Types continued Cradle Host Serial Port Profile Master Serial Port Profile Slave Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave 4 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Bluetooth Technology Profile Support With Bluetooth Technology Profile Support the cradle is not required for wireless communication The digital scanner communicates directly to the host using Bluetooth technology The digital scanner supports the standard Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP and HID Profiles which enable the digital scanner to communicate with other Bluetooth devices that support these profiles e SPP the digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection e HID the digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard Master Slave Set Up The digital scanner can be set up as a Master or Slave When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave it is discoverable and connectable to other devices When the digital scanner is set up as a Master the Bluetooth address of the remote device to which a connection is reque
291. rm a battery recondition approximately once a year To begin the battery recondition cycle 1 Scan Battery Recondition below Battery Recondition 2 Place the digital scanner into the cradle J NOTE f the scanner is removed from the cradle during the battery reconditioning cycle the scanner exits the battery reconditioning mode of operation and returns to the normal mode of battery charging see Charging the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 15 To restart the battery reconditioning cycle re scan the Battery Recondition parameter and place the scanner in the cradle 3 The digital scanner must perform two charge cycles to complete the battery reconditioning process discharge charge discharge charge See Table 1 2 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions Table 1 2 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions Battery Reconditioning LED Comments Mode Discharging Red Flash Time to discharge is approximately 2 5 hours Charging Green Flash Time to charge is approximately 2 5 hours with an external power supply Reconditioning Complete Green Solid always on The digital scanner enters a trickle charge until the digital scanner is removed from the cradle Getting Started 1 17 Radio Communications The digital scanner can communicate with remote devices via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support or by pairing with a cradle For radio communication parameters detailed information about operational modes Blueto
292. rmatted for readability 2C208R400 100 50 C2015R40 50 100 100 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expression 02 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 C 02 00 OF R 04 00 32 64 64 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 OxOF 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B NOTE The CR0078 S cradle supports SSI The CRO078 P cradle supports SNAPI Example 2b In Figure 5 3 if the bottom PDF417 bar code must transmit first reverse the sequence of the two bar codes The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 2C2015R4050 100 100 C208R400 100 50 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expression 02 C 02 00 OF R 04 00 32 64 64 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 OxOF 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B NOTE The CR0078 S cradle supports SSI The CRO078 P cradle supports SNAPI 0 50 100 0 0 0 Code 128 Code i Figure 5 3 Multicode Expression Example 2 100 50 50 0 50 PDF417 Code 160 100 100 5 42 DS6878 Product Reference Guide 0 40 50 100 Example 3 To decode the set of three bar codes
293. rogramming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the digital scanner and commonly used bar codes to customize how the data is transmitted to the host device Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences provide imaging preference features and programming bar codes for selecting these items Chapter 7 USB Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for USB operation Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for RS 232 operation Chapter 9 Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Keyboard Wedge operation Chapter 10 IBM Interface provides all information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle with IBM 468X 469X POS systems Chapter 11 Wand Emulation Interface provides all information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Wand Emulation operation Chapter 12 Scanner Emulation Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Scanner Emulation operation Chapter 13 123Scan2 PC based scanner configuration tool enables rapid and easy customized setup of Motorola Solutions scanners Chapter 14 OCR Programming describes how to set up the digital scanner for OCR programming Chapter 15 Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features for the digital scanner Chapter 16
294. rs Continued Parameter PeT Default SE OCR Quiet Zone 695 50 14 14 OCR Bright Illumination 701 Disable 14 15 OCR Template 547 54R 14 16 OCR Check Digit Modulus 688 1 14 25 OCR Check Digit Multiplier 700 121212121212 14 26 OCR Check Digit Validation 694 None 14 27 Inverse OCR 856 Regular 14 32 UPC EAN UPC A 1 Enable 15 7 UPC E 2 Enable 15 7 UPC E1 12 Disable 15 8 EAN 8 JAN 8 4 Enable 15 8 EAN 13 JAN 13 3 Enable 15 9 Bookland EAN 83 Disable 15 9 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 2 and 5 16 Ignore 15 10 digits User Programmable Supplementals 15 13 Supplemental 1 579 Supplemental 2 580 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 80 10 15 13 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID 672 Combined 15 14 Transmit UPC A Check Digit 40 Enable 15 15 Transmit UPC E Check Digit 41 Enable 15 15 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 42 Enable 15 16 UPC A Preamble 34 System Character 15 16 UPC E Preamble 35 System Character 15 17 UPC E1 Preamble 36 System Character 15 18 Convert UPC E to A 37 Disable 15 19 Convert UPC E1 to A 38 Disable 15 19 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend 39 Disable 15 20 Bookland ISBN Format 576 ISBN 10 15 20 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 9 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continued
295. s d Use the cotton tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the connector area e Use a dry cotton tipped applicator and repeat steps c d and e do not apply alcohol as directed in any of these steps 4 Cradle connector a Remove the DC power cable from the cradle b Dip the cotton portion of a cotton tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol c Rub the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator along the pins of the connector Slowly move the applicator back and forth from one side of the connector to the other Do not let any cotton residue remain on the connector d Rub all sides of the connector with the cotton tipped applicator e Spray compressed air in the connector area by pointing the tube nozzle approximately 1 2 inch 1 cm away from the surface CAUTION When using compressed air always wear eye protection do not point nozzle at yourself or A others make sure the nozzle or tube is pointing away from your face read warning label on compressed air product f Ensure that there is no lint left by the cotton tipped applicator Remove lint if found g If grease and other dirt are found on other areas of the cradle use a lint free cloth and isopropyl alcohol to remove h Allow at least 10 to 30 minutes depending on ambient temperature and humidity for the isopropyl alcohol to air dry before applying power to cradle J NOTE lf the temperature is low and humidity is high longer dry
296. s the code contains Set lengths for Code 11 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 11 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 11 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 11 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the di
297. s then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 93 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability 15 36 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 93 continued Code 93 One Discrete Length Code 93 Two Discrete Lengths Code 93 Length Within Range Code 93 Any Length Symbologies 15 37 Code 11 Code 11 Parameter 10 To enable or disable Code 11 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 11 1 Disable Code 11 0 Set Lengths for Code 11 Parameter L1 28 L2 29 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit
298. s 4 21 radio communication 04 1 17 SPP 422 2n ea area Ee ee a Bebe oad 4 4 troubleshooting 3 6 UNPA eaaa nana oF ee eon iaad th adoebiag s 4 24 parameter defaults all Aere Ee EE ST EE A 1 driver s license parsing 17 2 IBM 468X 469X 26 ee 10 3 imaging preferences 6 2 keyboard wedge 9 3 Lee RER 14 2 radio communication 0005 4 2 RS 232 2 basen tado nee cca nd Seed Pee Bes 8 3 scanner emulation 12 3 symbologieS 15 2 USB Au Mee tne dotted chee Ee 7 4 user preferences 0 00 cee eee eee 5 2 wand emulation 11 3 parameters driver s license Daring 17 3 IBM 468X 469X 0c eee eee 10 4 IMAGING 34a esciw E ae eho ANE 6 4 keyboard wedge 9 4 OCR d Addn due ede Rady ob ed ard 14 3 radio communication 4 4 RS 232 E wend el fee ee hay Ae A A 8 4 scanner emulation 12 4 Set defaults 242 02 AE EREN as 5 5 symbologies 15 7 USB ccs eas ey oe oe de ee eet MH 7 5 user preferences 22202000e0 5 6 wand emulation 11 4 parser version ID 17 16 parsing driver s license data 17 1 parts Grade 2212 SES SET RENE AS RTE 1 4 1 5 SCANNED waive sod awa ee he Ae Raa hee d 1 3 PDF417 bar codes 0 cee es 15 74 PDF prioritization 5 31 PIN code Sale aeeie Het te giao eA ee Weed a hed aed 4 30 variable 4 30 pinouts cradle signal descriptions 3 12 point to
299. s With Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters 11 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 By default the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the same symbology that was decoded This can be a problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies for example GS1 DataBar Enabling this parameter ignores the original symbology decoded and outputs the data as if it were a Code 39 bar code Any lowercase characters in the original data stream are transmitted as uppercase characters This also allows ADF rules If Ignore Unknown Characters is enabled any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If Ignore Unknown Characters is disabled if any characters that do not have a corresponding character are encountered the digital scanner emits an error beep and no data is transmitted v NOTE ADF Note By default the Wand Emulation interface does not allow scanned data to be processed by ADF rules Enabling this parameter has the side effect of allowing the scanned data to be processed by the ADF rules see Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting Enable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host
300. s captured denoted by a single beep If you do not press the trigger within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period the digital scanner returns to Decode Mode Use Snapshot Mode Timeout on page 6 7 to adjust this timeout period The default timeout period is 30 seconds To disable the laser aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode see Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 6 7 Snapshot Mode Imaging Preferences 6 5 Image Capture Illumination Parameter 361 Selecting Enable Image Capture Illumination causes illumination to turn on during every image capture Disable illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using illumination Enabling illumination usually results in superior images The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases Enable Image Capture Illumination 1 Disable Image Capture Illumination 0 6 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Gain Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode Parameter 562 This parameter alters the digital scanner s gain exposure priority when it acquires an image in Snapshot Mode in auto exposure mode Scan Low Exposure Priority to set a mode in which the digital scanner favors higher gain over exposure to capture an image This results in an image that is less susceptible to motion blur at the expense of noise artifacts However for most applications the amount of noise is acceptable Scan Low Gain Priority to set a mode
301. s is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature However if an X or other markings are added in the signature box area these are captured with the signature Figure G 1 CapCode G 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide CapCode Pattern Structure A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space a signature capture box a second separator space and then a stop pattern Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element the start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces A 7X quiet zone is required to the left and to the right of the CapCode pattern D oee Capture Box mn iil E Gs se Ea E aa ee Ea Figure G 2 CapCode Structure The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide Start Stop Patterns Table G 1 lists the accepted start stop patterns The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X You must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box The type value is reported with the captured signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured Table G 1 Start Stop Pattern Definitions Bar Space Patterns S B 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 5 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 7 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 8 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 Signature Capture Code G 3 Table G 2 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature
302. s it for the host IMPORTANT The CR0078 S cradle model STB4278 supports Wand Emulation The CRO078 P cradle model A N CR0078 does not support Wand Emulation we Interface Cable Mobile Computer Figure 11 1 Wand Emulation Connection To connect the Wand Emulation interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the CRO078 S CRO008 S Series Cradle on page 1 8 2 Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or controller 3 Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types on page 11 4 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter lt J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 11 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only Connecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty Wand Emulation Interface 11 3 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 11 1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host typ
303. s option to decode an 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability J NOTE Due to the construction of the 2 of 5 symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for 2 of 5 applications 15 42 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 continued I 2 of 5 One Discrete Length 12 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths 2 of 5 Length Within Range l 2 of 5 Any Length Symbologies 15 43 12 of 5 Check Digit Verification Parameter 49 Enable this feature to check the integrity of all 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specifie
304. sable 15 65 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 592 Disable 15 65 UPU FICS Postal 611 Disable 15 66 GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 338 Enable 15 67 GS1 DataBar Limited 339 15 67 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded 340 Enable 15 68 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 728 Level 3 15 69 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 397 Disable 15 70 Composite Composite CC C 341 15 71 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable Composite CC A B 342 15 71 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable Composite TLC 39 371 Disable 15 72 UPC Composite Mode 344 Never Linked 15 72 15 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 15 41 Symbologies Default Parameters Continued Parameter E Gr Default BG Composite Beep Mode 398 15 73 Non Healthcare Configurations Beep As Each Code Type is Decoded Healthcare Configurations Single Beep After Both are Decoded GS 1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite 427 Disable 15 73 Codes 2D Symbologies PDF417 15 Enable 15 74 MicroPDF417 227 Disable 15 74 Code 128 Emulation 123 Disable 15 75 Data Matrix 292 Enable 15 76 Data Matrix Inverse 588 15 76 Non Healthcare Configurations Regular Healthcare Configurations Inverse Autodetect Maxicode 294 Disable 15 77 QR Code 293 Enable 15 77 QR Inverse 587 Regular 15 78 MicroQR 573 Enable 15 78
305. screte Length Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters scan Codabar One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Codabar Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Codabar Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability 15 48 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Codabar continued Codabar One Discrete L
306. se for extended periods of time Figure 1 1 DS6878 Digital Scanner 1 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Interfaces The CRO078 S cradle supports all of the following interfaces The CR0078 P cradle supports all of the interfaces listed below with the exception of Wand Emulation Scanner Emulation and Synapse v USB connection to a host The cradle auto detects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus This interface supports the following international keyboards for Windows environment North America German French French Canadian Spanish Italian Swedish UK English Brazilian Portuguese and Japanese Standard RS 232 connection to a host Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the cradle with the host Keyboard Wedge connection to a host The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes This interface supports the following international keyboards for Windows environment North America German French French Canadian Spanish Italian Swedish UK English Portuguese Brazilian and Japanese Connection to IBM 468X 469X hosts Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the cradle with the IBM terminal Wand Emulation connection to a host The cradle CRO078 S only CRO078 P does not support Wand Emulation is connected to a portable data terminal a controller or host which collects the data as wand data
307. se tools help you every step of the way To download any of the free tools listed below go to www MotorolaSolutions com ScannerSoftware e 123Scan2 Configuration Utility described in this chapter e Scanner SDK for Windows e How to Videos e Virtual Com Port Driver e OPOS Driver e JPOS Driver e Scanner User Documentation e Archive of Older Drivers See Appendix E NON PARAMETER ATTRIBUTES for definitions and attribute numbers of non parameter attributes This appendix includes attributes electronically loaded to the scanner either by 123Scan or via SMS Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner for OCR programming The digital scanner can read 6 to 60 point OCR typeface It supports font types OCR A OCR B MICR E13B and US Currency Serial Number OCR is not as secure as a bar code To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading set an accurate OCR template and character subset and use a check digit All OCR fonts are disabled by default Enabling OCR can slow bar code decoding Enabling more than one OCR font could also slow OCR decoding and impact OCR decoding accuracy Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values n Indicates Default Disable OCR A Feature Option if NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be s
308. ser Mode Access R Values Variable Scankit Version Attribute 20008 Identifies the 1D decode algorithms resident on the device for example SKIT4 33T02 Type S Size Bytes Variable User Mode Access R Values Variable Imagekit Version Attribute 20013 Identifies the 2D decode algorithms resident in the device for example IMGKIT_4 04T02 Type S Size Bytes Variable User Mode Access R Values Variable In Cradle Detection Attribute 25000 Indicates if cordless scanner is inserted in the cradle Type B Size Bytes 1 User Mode Access R Values 0 Out of cradle 1 In cradle H 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Operational Mode Attribute 25001 Indicates if the scanner is being used in hand held or hands free mode Type B Size Bytes 1 User Mode Access R Values 0 Hand held 1 Hands free A Aperture The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit plus parity code representing 128 letters numerals punctuation marks and control characters It is a standard data transmission code in the U S Autodiscrimination The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code After this determination is made the information content is decoded B Bar The dark element in a printed bar code symbol Bar Code A pattern of variable width bars and spaces which represents n
309. sey ccasiedavedgexsvausinasttanneat badanamcensncesnancenatvens Goncpemecdenenendestweteteunveenvened 2 1 LED Detmntons 2 3 SCAMS E 2 5 Hand held Scanning EE 2 5 Hands free SCANNING EE 2 6 Aler e NEE 2 6 Ae E ite ET 2 8 Chapter 3 Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Introduchon ee AAN 3 1 UE En 3 1 RT E 3 1 Digital Scanner EE 3 2 Daily Cleaning and Disinfecting W 3 2 Monthly Deep Cleaning Maintenance 222 ccccccceseeseeccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeoneneeeeeeeeeeeaeenereseeeeeseeeneeee 3 3 Battery Informatio eegene 3 4 Been ee le E 3 4 Technical Specifications eee 3 9 Cradle Signal SS Te le EE 3 12 Chapter 4 Radio Communications MMO GU COM EE 4 1 Scanning Sequence Examples ccccccccecccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeens 4 1 Errors While Scanning WEE 4 1 Radio Communications Parameter Defaults c ceceseceeeeneeeeaeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeas 4 2 Wireless Beeper Definitions cccccccccccceccceccceeceeeceee cette cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneetisneneees 4 3 Radio Communications Host Types zeszggsegrkitetsgese gend A EegEE EE elo EENEG deed 4 4 Bluetooth Technology Profile Support sscchcccccdicasdsves den encxssesstyeenciceccevendsvacblavecnentindecesesuxsossuitueatbene 4 6 Master Slave Set Up 4 6 Bluetooth Friendly ENEE EEN SERGE 4 7 Discoverable Mode MEPE 4 7 Wi Fi EE Mode need ee 4 8 Notes ue 4 8
310. smit If you select Autodiscriminate UPC Composites the digital scanner determines if there is a 2D portion then transmits the UPC as well as the 2D portion if present UPC Never Linked 0 UPC Always Linked 1 Autodiscriminate UPC Composites 2 Symbologies 15 73 Composite Beep Mode Parameter 398 To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded scan the appropriate bar code Single Beep After Both are Decoded 0 Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded 1 Double Beep after Both are Decoded 2 E NOTE For HC configurations the default is Single Beep After Both are Decoded GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes Parameter 427 Select whether to enable or disable this mode Enable GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes 1 Disable GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes 0 15 74 DS6878 Product Reference Guide 2D Symbologies Enable Disable PDF417 Parameter 15 To enable or disable PDF417 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable PDF417 1 Disable PDF417 0 Enable Disable MicroPDF417 Parameter 227 To enable or disable MicroPDF417 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable M
311. ssword on the digital scanner scan the bar code below followed by five alphanumeric programming bar codes see Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes The default PIN code is 12345 If the digital scanner communicates with a cradle with security enabled synchronize the PIN codes on the digital scanner and cradle To achieve this connect the digital scanner to the cradle when setting the PIN codes If the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle the PIN code change only takes affect on the digital scanner If security is required between the digital scanner and cradle and the PIN codes do not match pairing fails If the PIN codes are not synchronized re synchronize them by disabling security establishing a connection to the cradle and then programming a new PIN code Set PIN Code Variable PIN Code The default PIN code is the user programmed Static PIN Code Typically however HID connections require entering a Variable PIN Code If when attempting connection the application presents a text box that includes a PIN scan the Variable PIN Code bar code then re attempt connection When you hear a beep indicating the digital scanner is waiting for an alphanumeric entry enter the provided variable PIN using the Alphanumeric Bar Codes on page E 1 then scan End of Message on page E 7 if the code is less than 16 characters The digital scanner discards the variable PIN code after connection Static PIN Code Variable PIN Code Radio Comm
312. stal 91 Disable 15 61 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 96 Enable 15 62 Japan Postal 290 Disable 15 62 Australian Postal 291 Disable 15 63 Australia Post Format 718 Autodiscriminate 15 64 Netherlands KIX Code 326 Disable 15 65 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 592 Disable 15 65 UPU FICS Postal 611 Disable 15 66 GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 338 Enable 15 67 GS1 DataBar Limited 339 15 67 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded 340 Enable 15 68 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 728 Level 3 15 69 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 397 Disable 15 70 Composite Composite CC C 341 15 71 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable Composite CC A B 342 15 71 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable Composite TLC 39 371 Disable 15 72 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Continued Parameter sl hae Default is ae UPC Composite Mode 344 Never Linked 15 72 Composite Beep Mode 398 15 73 Non Healthcare Configurations Beep As Each Code Type is Decoded Healthcare Configurations Single Beep After Both are Decoded GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite 427 Disable 15 73 Codes 2D Symbologies PDF417 15 Enable 15 74 MicroPDF41
313. sted is required A pairing bar code with the remote device address must be created and scanned to attempt a connection to the remote device See the Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 25 for information about creating a pairing bar code Master When the digital scanner is set up as a Master SPP it initiates the radio connection to a slave device Initiating the connection is done by scanning a pairing bar code for the remote device see Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 25 Slave When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave device SPP the digital scanner accepts an incoming connection request from a remote device J NOTE The number of digital scanners is dependent on the host s capability Radio Communications 4 7 Bluetooth Friendly Name You can set a meaningful name for the digital scanner that appears in the application during device discovery The default name is the digital scanner name followed by its serial number e g DS6878 123456789ABCDEF Scanning Set Defaults reverts the digital scanner to this name use custom defaults to maintain the user programmed name through a Set Defaults operation To set a new Bluetooth Friendly Name scan the following bar code then scan up to 23 characters from Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes If the name contains less than 23 characters scan End of Message on page E 7 after entering the name J NOTE f your application allows you to set a device name this takes precedence over
314. t e 1073 The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent F 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Full ASCII E Code 39 Encode Character Aaa 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 A X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 Deh 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N d 1095 O 1096 W i 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C c 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent ASCII Character Sets F 5 Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued ASA ELG Code 39 E EE E 1103 G g 1104 H h 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S s 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W W 1120 X D 1121 Y y 1122 Z H 1123 P 1124 DC 1125 R 1126 S The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent F 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 2 ALT Key Stan
315. t a yellow LED on every trigger pull to signal that all data will be transmitted over Bluetooth in a secure fashion On failure the scanner will sound transmission failure error message on every attempt to transmit data To disable the FIPS mode scan the Disable FIPS bar code at any time Enable FIPS 1 Disable FIPS 0 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 31 PDF Prioritization Parameter 719 Enable this feature to delay decoding a 1D bar code Code 128 by the value specified in PDF Prioritization Timeout During that time the digital scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol e g on a US driver s license and if successful reports this only If it does not decode can not find a PDF417 symbol it reports the 1D symbol after the timeout The 1D symbol must be in the device s field of view for the digital scanner to report it This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies NOTE The 1D Code 128 bar code lengths include the following e 7 to 10 characters e 14 to 17 characters e 27 to 28 characters In addition a Code 39 bar code with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US driver s license e 8 characters e 12 characters Disable PDF Prioritization 0 Enable PDF Prioritization 1 PDF Prioritization Timeo
316. t 1 or 2 gt supp data All other UPC EAN with supplementals transmit as JE3 lt data supps gt e Separate Transmissions transmit UPC EAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs and separate transmissions Le E lt 0 or 4 gt lt data gt JE lt 1 or 2 gt supplemental data Separate 0 Combined 1 Separate Transmissions 2 Symbologies 15 15 Transmit UPC A Check Digit Parameter 40 The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC A check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC A Check Digit 1 Do Not Transmit UPC A Check Digit 0 Transmit UPC E Check Digit Parameter 41 The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC E check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC E Check Digit 1 Do Not Transmit UPC E Check Digit 0 15 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide
317. t Reference Guide RS 232 Host Types To select an RS 232 host interface scan one of the following bar codes Standard RS 232 ICL RS 232 Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Mode A Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Mode B Olivetti ORS4500 RS 232 Interface 8 7 RS 232 Host Types continued Omron OPOS JPOS Fujitsu RS 232 SITA CUTE J NOTE The SITA CUTE host disables all parameter scanning including set defaults If the SITA CUTE parameter is inadvertently selected scan Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 1 on page 5 6 then change the host selection 8 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Baud Rate Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second Set the digital scanner s baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device Otherwise data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form Baud Rate 9600 Baud Rate 19 200 The following baud rate parameters Baud Rate 57 600 and Baud Rate 115 200 apply to the CR0078 P cradle only Baud Rate 57 600 Baud Rate 38 400 Baud Rate 115 200 RS 232 Interface 8 9
318. ta sent to the Scanner Emulation host is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII The host must be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII 12 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmission Timeout The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert the Decode signal indicating successful transmission If after a specified amount of time the Decode signal is not asserted indicating that the attached decoder has not successfully received the bar code data the digital scanner issues transmit error beeps Scan a bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout 3 Second Transmission Timeout 4 Second Transmission Timeout 5 Second Transmission Timeout 10 Second Transmission Timeout 30 Second Transmission Timeout Scanner Emulation Interface 12 9 Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize When Ignore Unk
319. tal Scanner Add Decode Pager Motor and Decode Pager Motor Duration Add Night Mode Trigger and Toggle Change Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode to Time Delay to Hand held Low Power Mode Update Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol description Add Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval Add Dump Scanner Parameters Add Report Version For USB Device Type Change HID Keyboard Emulation to USB Keyboard HID Change USB OPOS Hand held to IBM OPOS IBM Hand held USB with Full Scan Disable and added related note Change CDC COM Port Emulation to USB CDC Host Add SSI over USB CDC and related note Update 123Scan2 chapter Add Require and Suppress to OCR chapter Add OCR B Variant Travel Document 2 or 3 line ID Cards auto detect Add Multiple Templates section to OCR chapter Add Inverse OCR parameter Add Separate Transmissions option to UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Add Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters Transmission Change GS1 DataBar Limited default to Enable Change Security Level default to 1 Replace ADF chapter content with a reference to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide Update Drivers License Parsing text jurisdictional updates no longer apply 05 Rev A 8 2014 Add Wi Fi Friendly Mode and Wi Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion parameters Add non parameter attributes appendix Update QR Code sample bar code vi
320. tandard Default Table Continued Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock Table F 8 Extended Keypad Standard Default Table Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow F 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction CapCode a signature capture code is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form For example on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas one each for two joint filers and one for a professional preparer By using different patterns a program can correctly identify all three so they can be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly Code Structure Signature Capture Area A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box as shown in Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box The box is optional so you can omit it replace it with a single baseline or print a baseline with an X on top of it towards the left a
321. tandard RTS CTS handshaking is selected scan data is transmitted according to the following sequence e The digital scanner reads the CTS line for activity If CTS is asserted the digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for the host to de assert the CTS line If after Host Serial Response Time out the CTS line is still asserted the digital scanner sounds a transmit error and any scanned data is lost e When the CTS line is de asserted the digital scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for the host to assert CTS When the host asserts CTS data is transmitted If after Host Serial Response Time out the CTS line is not asserted the digital scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data e When data transmission is complete the digital scanner de asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character e The host should respond by negating CTS The digital scanner checks for a de asserted CTS upon the next transmission of data During the transmission of data the CTS line should be asserted If CTS is de asserted for more than 50 ms between characters the transmission is aborted the digital scanner sounds a transmission error and the data is discarded If the above communication sequence fails the digital scanner issues an error indication In this case the data is lost and must be rescanned If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled Hardware Handsh
322. te from the Transmit Code ID feature The Transmit Code ID feature should not be enabled for these terminals Table 8 3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters Wincor Wincor Nixdorf Code Type ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Mode B Olivetti Omron CUTE Mode A OPOS JPOS UPC A A A A A A A A UPC E C C C E None EAN 8 JAN 8 FF FF B B B FF None EAN 13 JAN 13 F F A A A F A Code 39 C lt len gt None M M M lt len gt C lt len gt 3 Code 39 Full ASCII None None M M None None 3 Codabar N lt len gt None N N N lt len gt N lt len gt None Code 128 L lt len gt None K K K lt len gt L lt len gt 5 12 of 5 lt len gt None l l lt len gt lt len gt 1 Code 93 None None L L L lt len gt None None D2of5 H lt len gt None H H H lt len gt H lt len gt 2 GS1 128 L lt len gt None P P P lt len gt L lt len gt 5 MSI None None O O O lt len gt None None Bookland EAN F F A A A F None Trioptic None None None None None None None Code 11 None None None None None None None IATA H lt len gt None H H H lt len gt H lt len gt 2 Code 32 None None None None None None None GS1 Databar None None E E None None None Variants PDF417 None None Q Q None None 6 Datamatrix None None R R None None 4 QR Codes None None U U None None 7 Aztec Aztec Rune None None V V None None 8 Micro PDF None None S S None None 6 Maxicode None None T T None None None 8 6 DS6878 Produc
323. te in the network Parameter A variable that can have different values assigned to it Percent Decode The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode In a well designed bar code scanning system that probability should approach near 100 Print Contrast Signal PCS Measurement of the contrast brightness difference between the bars and spaces of a symbol A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable PCS RL RD RL where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars Glossary 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Programming Mode The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values See Scanning Mode Q Quiet Zone A clear space containing no dark marks which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character QWERTY A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards QWERTY refers to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys R Reflectance Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface Resolution The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method RF Radio Frequency RS 232 An Electronic Industries Association EIA standard that defines the connector connector pins and signals used to transfer data ser
324. teesttettttttttttttttttttttttttttEtEttEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 15 83 Ee lee E 15 83 Macro PDF Features wsviciccsicassccactestderscbsdcinacen ndubendaviencat edesteneteusanedetocsdacnsenecuadeosdslantesoedaddecesteeeusevis 15 84 Flush Macro Buffer 15 84 Abort Macro ER Kelereiber 15 84 Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting ere tee E 16 1 Chapter 17 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL tee TE EE 17 1 DL Parsing Parameter Defaults v2 5cc1 ss00 222esedervanctasetces Scastnrtssgacbacucndnnsusbesezsteeuasandeanudees dealsecaercnedh 17 2 Driver s License Parsing EE 17 3 Parsing Driver s License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing eeeececrenneen 17 3 Embedded Driver s License Parsing Criteria Code Type cccceccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeeeeeees 17 3 Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes 2 ccccccesssccccscseeereeeesseeeeneneeeeseeneeeeeeeneeesnnensenenenee 17 4 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes u e cceccecceeecsecceeeceeecenecneeeeececeeceeeeaeeeueeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeeseeenenenes 17 7 Table of Contents xv User Preferences egene EEN sass a Eea a EE eE EE EKA AEE ENEAN TREES 17 17 Set Default Parameter c ccsseeseeeeseeeceeeceeeeeeseeeaeeaaeeaseeasaeaaaeaaaeaaeeaaeaaaaaaaeeaaeeaaeaaeeaaeeaaeess 17 17 Output Gender as M OF F oo eee eeeeescenseeeneee eee eee eaneeaeaaanaeaeaeaeaaneaaneaeneaeeaaeeaaanaaeeaaeeaaneaeeeaeaeaeeas 17 17 Date Format acca cecc ier ctce eegenen EE
325. tely attempts to reconnect for the default time interval of 30 seconds This time interval can be changed to one of the following options e 30 seconds e 1 minute e 5 minutes e 30 minutes e 1 hour e indefinitely To set the Reconnect Attempt Interval scan one of the bar codes below Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Seconds Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Minute Attempt to Reconnect for 5 Minutes Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Minutes Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Hour Attempt to Reconnect Indefinitely 4 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode In Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave mode select a re connect option for when the digital scanner loses its connection with a remote device e Auto reconnect on Bar Code Data The digital scanner auto reconnects when you scan a bar code With this option a delay can occur when transmitting the first characters The digital scanner sounds a decode beep upon bar code scan followed
326. tem Character only transmit System Character and Country Code 0 for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 0 System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 1 System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 2 15 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC E1 Preamble Parameter 36 Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC E1 preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code 0 for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 0 System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 1 System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER lt DATA gt 2 Symbologies 15 19 Convert UPC E to UPC A Parameter 37 Enable this to convert UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before
327. tempt Interval is adjusted to a longer period of time such as 30 minutes the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds for 30 minutes providing an out of range indicator Radio Communications 4 21 Digital Scanner s To Cradle Support Modes of Operation The charging cradle with radio supports two radio communication modes of operation allowing the digital scanner to communicate wirelessly e Point to Point e Multipoint to Point Point to Point Communication In Point to Point communication mode the cradle allows one digital scanner to connect to it at a time In this mode the digital scanner is paired to the cradle either by insertion into the cradle if pairing on contacts is enabled page 4 24 or by scanning the PAIR bar code Communication can be locked unlocked default or in a lock override state see Pairing Modes on page 4 23 In locked mode locking intervals must be set by scanning a connection maintenance interval bar code beginning on page 4 26 To activate this mode of operation scan Point to Point Multipoint to Point Communication Multipoint to Point communication mode allows up to three digital scanners to pair to one cradle for the CR0078 S and up to seven digital scanners for the CR0078 P To activate this mode the first digital scanner connected to the cradle must scan the Multipoint to Point bar code This mode allows a parameter broadcast page 4 22 feature that forwards parameter bar
328. ter monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces do not merge Select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connected to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks E indicate default values Indicates default _ Enable UPC A Feature Option 1 Option decimal value Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to transmit bar code data without the UPC A check digit simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC A Check Digit bar code under The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters such as Set Length s for D 2 of 5 require scanning several bar codes See the individual parameter such as Set Length s for D 2 of 5 for this procedure 15 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter Symbology Parameter Defaults Table 15 1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters To change the default values scan th
329. the parameter bar code does not result in a successful decode The following examples show the multicode expressions in both hex and decimal formats however in the sample figures the values are decimal Be sure to use the correct base numbering system when creating an expression A region specified as 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 represents a region with coordinates of Top Left 0 0 and Bottom Right 100 50 5 40 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Example 1 To decode one Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image even when bar codes of other types are in view as in Figure 5 2 program the expression as follows The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 1C208 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is spaces are for readability MultiCode Expression 01 C 02 00 08 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x01 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 Ox3b J NOTE The CR0078 S cradle supports SSI The CRO078 P cradle supports SNAPI 0 50 100 0 PDF417 Code k Code 128 Code 50 UPC A Code 0 ii 67890 5 100 Figure 5 2 Multicode Expression Example 1 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 41 Example 2a To decode a Code128 Code Type 8 on the top half of the image and a PDF417 Code Type 15 on the bottom half of the image as in Figure 5 3 program the expression as follows The expression in decimal is fo
330. those illustrated but the steps to connect the digital scanner cradle remain the same If problems occur with the system see Troubleshooting on page 3 4 7 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Parameter Defaults Table 7 1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters If any option needs to be changed scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 7 5 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 7 1 USB Host Default Parameters Parameter Default ec ae USB Host Parameters USB Device Type USB Keyboard HID 7 5 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking Enable 7 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes North American 7 8 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 7 10 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 7 10 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send 7 11 USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 7 11 Emulate Keypad Disable 7 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Disable 7 12 Quick Keypad Emulation Disable 7 13 USB FN1 Substitution Disable 7 13 USB Static CDC Enable 7 14 Function Key Mapping Disable 7 14 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 7 15 Convert Case No Case Conversion 7 15 Ignore Beep Disable 7 16 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 7 16 USB Polling Interval 8 msec 7 17 USB Interface 7 5 USB Host Parameters USB Device Type Select the desired US
331. tion file that can be distributed via e mail electronically downloaded via a USB cable or used to generate a sheet of scannable programming bar codes Additionally 123Scan can upgrade scanner firmware check online to enable support for newly released products generate a collection of multi setting bar codes if the number of settings is very large stage large number of scanners simultaneously generate reports with asset tracking information and create custom products Communication with 123Scan2 To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows XP SP2 Windows 7 or Windows 8 operating system use a USB cable to connect the scanner to the host computer see 13 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide 123Scan Requirements e Host computer with Windows XP SP2 or Windows 7 e Scanner e USB cable For more information on123Scan go to http www motorolasolutions com 123Scan For a 1 minute video tour of 123Scan go to http www motorolasolutions com scannerhowtovideos To download 123Scan software and access the Help file integrated in the utility go to http support symbol com support product 123Scan2 html Scanner SDK Other Software Tools and Videos Tackle all your scanner programming needs with our diversified set of software tools Whether you need to simply stage a device or develop a fully featured application with image and data capture as well as asset management the
332. tries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping USB Interface 7 15 Simulated Caps Lock When enabled the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard s Caps Lock state Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case No Case Conversion Convert All to Upper Case Convert All to Lower Case 7 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Optional USB Parameters If you configure the digital scanner and find the settings were not saved or changed when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override USB interface defaults Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the digital scanner Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the digital sca
333. ture Capture Bits Per Pixel E 6 18 Signature Capture Width EE 6 19 Signature Capture Height EE 6 19 Signature Capture JPEG Quality 6 19 Chapter 7 USB Interface lah gaye 6 ei fe 9 ee ENEE 7 1 Connecting a USB al e EE 7 2 USB Parameter Defaults issiima airi neea E EREE a A EAE E nea 7 4 RE Ge EE 7 5 USB Devic Type ee 7 5 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking sseeeesseeeeseeeieeeeesesrirrrrrrsssrrrrrrrnsssrrrrrnrnssnne 7 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeenneeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeaaaes 7 8 USB Keystroke Delay Wetter EE eege 7 10 USB CAPS Lock Override dorciccsnadainscecnterosnaeiaviccccteaeeteerasuabcotwededsauninasconintnetmesactoanmceatwedauatcens 7 10 USB Ignore Unknown GiaraGlelS sicsccncticcstatsavuarutenadsilenniaguaceisainsininennnithensdedsarnauatecietnenseausionts 7 11 USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 sncccccciccsssicedsccasmecatenadswaccesievenercnadseontbiearkexebadeisncenareueasaars 7 11 Emulate E 7 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeneceeeeeneeeeseeeseneeseneeeeeneeseneaees 7 12 Quick Keypad Emulation GE 7 13 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution BEE 7 13 USB Statie E 7 14 F ncton Key Mapping RE 7 14 simulated ee Ee EE 7 15 OO A eege eeeteeegegeeeen 7 15 Optional USB Parameters cccccceccecccceeceeececeeeeceecceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeetenenneas 7 16 ef E 7 16 Ignore Bar Code e
334. ultiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6 Product 1 6 6 16 25 36 Digit add 1 6 6 146 2 5 3 6 36 The Check Digit Modulus is 12 It passes because 36 is divisible by 12 the remainder is 0 Digit Add Left to Right 4 OCR Programming 14 29 Digit Add Right to Left Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 15 8 12 10 6 Digit add 6 145 8 142 1 0 6 30 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 30 is divisible by 10 the remainder is 0 Digit Add Right to Left 2 14 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in
335. um Field of View Small Field of View 0 Medium Field of View 1 Full Field of View 2 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 37 Decoding Illumination Parameter 298 Selecting Enable Decoding Illumination causes the digital scanner to flash illumination to aid decoding Select Disable Decoding Illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using decoding illumination Enabling illumination usually results in superior images The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases Enable Decoding Illumination 1 Disable Decoding Illumination 0 Multicode Mode Parameter 677 Enable this parameter to allow multiple bar codes to decode upon one trigger event based on the programmed multicode expression The digital scanner reports a successful decode and provides user indication only if it decodes all bar codes indicated by the multicode expression otherwise the decode fails Bar codes are transmitted in the order defined in the multicode expression Disable this to operate in normal decode mode When using this mode disable Continuous Bar Code Read on page 5 32 and always orient the digital scanner at the same distance and angle perpendicular Disabl
336. umeric or alphanumeric data in machine readable form The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin start character data or message character check character if any stop character and trailing margin Within this framework each recognizable symbology uses its own unique format See Symbology Bar Code Density The number of characters represented per unit of measurement e g characters per inch Bar Height The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width Bar Width Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar Bit Binary digit One bit is the basic unit of binary information Generally eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning Bits per Second bps Bits transmitted or received Bluetooth A technology that provides a way to connect and exchange information between devices such as scanners mobile phones laptops PCs and printers over a secure globally unlicensed short range radio frequency Glossary 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Boot or Boot up The process a computer goes through when it starts During boot up the computer can run self diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software bps See Bits Per Second Byte On an addressable boundary eight adjacent binary digits 0 and 1 combined in a pattern to represent a specific
337. unications 4 31 Encryption J NOTE Authentication must be performed before Encryption can take effect To set up the digital scanner for enabling Encryption scan Enable Encryption To prevent the digital scanner from enabling Encryption scan Disable Encryption When enabled the radio encrypts data Enable Encryption Disable Encryption 4 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Secure Simple Pairing IO Capability SPP Server and SPP Master Host Mode Only Bluetooth 2 1 uses the Secure Simple Pairing method to authenticate devices and create an encryption key As a part of that algorithm the device must state its IO capabilities When in Serial Profile Host master or slave the default is No Input No Output and no user interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the pairing process Keyboard Only passkey entry is used between a device with a display and a device with numeric keypad entry such as a keyboard or two devices with numeric keypad entry In the first case the display shows a 6 digit numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the second case the user of each device enters the same 6 digit number J NOTE Use this option to connect to an Android tablet e No Input No Output Least amount of security may not be acceptable for some devices e Keyboard Only Higher level of security No Input
338. universal cables with shielded modular plugs Image Capture Not available Supported via SNAPI OCR MICR Not available Supported via SNAPI 1 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting the CR0078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle Connect the interface cable and power supply if necessary in the following order to ensure proper operation of the digital scanner and cradle Power Port J NOTE The CR0078 S cradle has the ability to be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply The CR0078 P can only receive power via an external power supply If a power supply is connected to the cradle disconnect it If using an interface cable insert the cable into the cradle s host port See Figure 1 7 If using a power supply that connects to the interface cable insert this power supply into the power connector on the interface cable and the other end to an AC supply Insert the other end of the interface cable into the appropriate port on the host computer see the specific host chapter for information on host connections If using an external power supply if required by the interface or to allow fast charging of the digital scanner insert the power cable into the power port on the back of the cradle and connect the power supply to an approved AC supply refer to the CRO078 S CRO008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide for more information Host Port Power Host Port Power Port Conn
339. ure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging 14 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Parameter Defaults Table 14 1 lists the defaults for OCR parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 14 3 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 14 1 OCR Programming Default Parameters Parameter Be Default Page Number OCR Programming Parameters OCR A 680 Disable 14 3 OCR A Variant 684 Full ASCII 14 3 OCR B 681 Disable 14 5 OCR B Variant 685 Full ASCII 14 6 MICR E13B 682 Disable 14 9 US Currency 683 Disable 14 10 OCR Orientation 687 0 14 10 OCR Lines 691 1 14 12 OCR Minimum Characters 689 3 14 12 OCR Maximum Characters 690 100 14 13 OCR Security Level 554 80 14 13 OCR Subset 686 Selected font 14 14 variant OCR Quiet Zone 695 50 14 14 OCR Bright Illumination 701 Disable 14 15 OCR Template 547 54R 14 16 OCR Check Digit Modulus 688 1 14 25 OCR Check Digit Multiplier 700 121212121212 14 26 OCR Check Digit Validation 694 None 14 27 Inverse OCR 856 Regular 14 32 OCR Programming 14 3 OCR Programming Parameters Enable Disable OCR A Parameter 680 To enable or disable OCR A scan one of the following
340. ustrated in Figure 9 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 3 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults Table 9 1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page 9 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 9 1 Keyboard Wedge Host Default Parameters Parameter Default Piha le Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC AT amp IBM PC Compatibles 9 4 Country Types Country Codes North American 9 5 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 9 7 Keystroke Delay No Delay 9 7 Intra Keystroke Delay Disable 9 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 9 8 Caps Lock On Disable 9 9 Caps Lock Override Disable 9 9 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 9 10 Function Key Mapping Disable 9 10 FN1 Substitution Disable 9 11 Send and Make Break Send 9 11 9 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Types Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below IBM PC AT amp IBM PC
341. ut Parameter 720 When PDF Prioritization is enabled this timeout specifies how long the digital scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol before reporting the 1D bar code in the field of view Scan the following bar code then scan four digits from Numeric Bar Codes on page D 1 that specify the timeout in milliseconds For example to enter 400 msec scan the following bar code then scan 0400 The range is 0 to 5000 msec and the default is 200 msec PDF Prioritization Timeout 5 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Continuous Bar Code Read Parameter 649 Enable this to report every bar code while the trigger is pressed J NOTE Motorola strongly recommends enabling Picklist Mode on page 5 28 with this feature Disabling Picklist Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one bar code is in the imaging engine s field of view Disable Continuous Bar Code Read 0 Enable Continuous Bar Code Read 1 Unique Bar Code Reporting Parameter 723 Enable this to report only unique bar codes while the trigger is pressed This option only applies when Continuous Bar Code Read is enabled Disable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness 0 Enable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness 1 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 33 Decode Session Timeout Parameter 136 This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt It is
342. ut to Low Power Mode from Auto AIM cccccccccccececeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeteeens 5 27 PICKIISt MOG ET 5 28 Mobile Phone Display E 5 29 FIPS MOJE EE 5 30 PDF Prioritization ccccccccccecccccccececeeeseesececeesesseeeeueecececeeeseeaeaeaseececeeeesesaeaeaseceseesessesuaagessaeseees 5 31 PDF Prioritization TimeOut eisir oiir a aia an E arar ir Seier 5 31 Continuous Bar Code Read cccccccceeeceeeeee cette eee eee e eee t eee et ete eee eget eee gegeegdeeneeeeeseeeseeeeeees 5 32 Unique Bar Code Reporting cccccecceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaseeseeaaaeeaaeeaaaaaaeaaaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeess 5 32 Decode Session Timeout cecceccceecc eee eeeeeeee eect eee e eae eeaeeeaaeeeaeeaeeeseesseceeeesseeeeeeeeeesseeseeeseesteees 5 33 Timeout Between Decodes Game Symbol ccccccccceccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 33 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols ccccccccceccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 5 33 Fuzzy 1D ProCessin ME 5 34 Hand held Decode Aiming Pattern dicsaticicticccteiienientusennsntenruessoueiaottadeensdeuastieceseastivasiasdewtaseanges 5 34 Hands free Decode Aiming Pattern cccccccseceeeecneeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeenenesseseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeseeeeeeneees 5 35 Presentation Mode Field of View ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaeeaaeaaaaaaaeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeeaaeeaeeeas 5 36 Deco ding HIV NEE 5 37 Multicode Mo
343. uueeeeeeaeeeenaneenes 12 7 Transmission Timeout scot ieee ice ice eel eee ste ate endive een ial a eet 12 8 Ignore Unknown Kee Ee 12 9 Re Le dee EE 12 9 Check For Decode LED 12 10 Chapter 13 123Scan2 Modu ON anaren E AAT A A E A 13 1 Communication with 1238can2 o c ccecccecccccecccceecceuecesuuuceuueceeeuuceeeaceeeuuesuuueeeuuaeauaueseuaueeeugesuaaeeauaases 13 1 123Scan2 Requirements cccccecccscceeeccaeeeeceeeeeeaeececcaeeeeeecaeceneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeetiias 13 2 Scanner SDK Other Software Tools and Videos 13 2 Chapter 14 OCR Programming AKE ELTE E EE 14 1 OCR Parameter Defaults EE 14 2 OCR Programming E 14 3 Enable Disable OCR A gesteigert eege ed Ee EE Deg 14 3 CRAY Aiea EE 14 3 Enable Disable OCR B sicicsiisecdicctditetcteviesii Seca cdesasctdaceticddcecdans oddaeiuddeeesnagetanentdaestaaceidaneseaassecders 14 5 le V AAG EE 14 6 Enable Disable MICR EIB 14 9 Enable Disable US Currency Serial Number ccccceeseeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenenseneeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 14 10 OCR Orientation EE 14 10 OGR LINES E EE EE 14 12 OCR Minimum Characters oo cece cceccceeecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeesueeseeuueeeeeeueueaeeeaueeaeuueeaueusueeueneueeeueeneees 14 12 OCR Maximum Characters o ceccccccccccccceecccceeesueeseeeueesueeeeeaueeeeueeeeeueeeauaeeueeeeaueusaeeeeeeeseeuenes 14 13 OCR Se e EE 14 13 EI 14 14 QCR Quiet ZONE dissicssinctsartsanssnansddonisandcdaitaadansetsanandicaosansisastanagnddaars
344. value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec This parameter accommodates older wand decoders which cannot handle short leading margins J NOTE 250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain however 200 msec is sufficient 80 msec 140 msec 200 msec Wand Emulation Interface 11 5 Polarity Scan a bar code below to select the polarity required by the decoder Polarity determines how the cradle s Wand Emulation interface creates the Digitized Bar code Pattern DBP DBP is a digital signal that represents the scanned bar code Different decoders expect the DBP to be in a certain format The DBP either has the highs represent bars and the lows represent spaces margins or the highs represent spaces margins and the lows represent bars Bar High Margin Low Bar Low Margin High Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host and the digital scanner emits an error beep Send Bar Code
345. various functions or activate different features This chapter describes imaging preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features The digital scanner ships with the settings in also see for all host device and miscellaneous defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when you power down the digital scanner of NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging If not using a USB cable select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connecting to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Se Feature Option Indicates default Enable Decode Aiming Pattern 2 Option decimal value for programming 5 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to set the beeper tone to high scan the High Frequency beeper tone bar code l
346. w to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit Transmit MSI Check Digit s Enable 1 Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit s Disable 0 15 54 DS6878 Product Reference Guide MSI Check Digit Algorithm Parameter 51 Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit Select the bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit MOD 10 MOD 11 0 MOD 10 MOD 10 1 Chinese 2 of 5 Enable Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Parameter 408 To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Chinese 2 of 5 1 Disable Chinese 2 of 5 0 Symbologies 15 55 Matrix 2 of 5 Enable Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Parameter 618 To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Matrix 2 of 5 1 Disable Matrix 2 of 5 0 15 56 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 Parameter L1 619 L2 620 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length one or two
347. while excluding the center Code 128 bar code as in Figure 5 4 the expression is The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 3C2015R 400 50 50 C 2 FO 24 R 4 700 100 40 C208 R465 60 100 100 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expression 03 C 02 00 OF R 04 00 00 32 32 C 02 FO 24 R 04 46 00 64 28 C 02 00 08 R 04 41 3C 64 64 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x03 0x43 0x02 0x00 OxOF 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x32 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 OxFO 0x24 0x52 0x04 0x46 0x00 0x64 0x28 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x41 Ox3C 0x64 0x64 0x3B J NOTE The CROO78 S cradle supports SSI The CR0078 P cradle supports SNAPI 100 0 40 50 70 0 0 70 0 L Kin A PDF417 Code 40 40 Data Matrix Code 100 40 Code 128 Code 65 60 Code 128 Code 100 100 65 Figure 5 4 Multicode Expression Example 3 40 60 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 43 Multicode Mode Concatenation Parameter 717 Enable this parameter to transmit multiple decoded bar codes as specified by the Multicode Expression as one bar code Use the Multicode Concatenation Symbology parameter to specify how the concatenated bar codes transmit Disable this to transmit decoded bar codes separately J NOTE When using Multicode Mo
348. with the user using a two color LED display Table 2 2 defines LED colors that display during scanning Table 2 2 Scanner LED Definitions with CRO078 S Cradle LED Indication Scanning Green Flash A bar code was successfully decoded Red Solid Transmission error or digital scanner malfunction Charging Green Slow Continuous Flash Non critical battery temperature fault Battery is above or below normal operating temperature If this occurs do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature Note For appropriate charging temperatures see Table 3 3 on page 3 10 Green Fast Continuous Flash Digital scanner is charging Green Solid Digital scanner is fully charged Red Solid Scanner is in pre charge charge error or communications error with cradle Amber Flash Critical battery temperature fault Battery is above or below normal operating temperature If this occurs do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature Note For appropriate charging temperatures see Table 3 3 on page 3 10 2 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide vV NOTE f the scanner was previousl
349. y 123Scan or via SMS for example 18MAY14 which reads the 18th of May 2014 Type S Size Bytes 7 User Mode Access R Values Variable Configuration Filename Attribute 616 The name assigned to the configuration settings loaded electronically to the device either by 123Scan or via SMS J NOTE Scanning the Set Defaults bar code automatically changes the configuration filename to factory defaults To indicate the configuration settings loaded to the device were changed the configuration filename changes to Modified upon scanning any parameter bar code Type S Size Bytes 17 User Mode Access RW Values Variable Night Mode Attribute 5014 Indicates if the scanner is currently in night mode Type F Size Bytes 1 User Mode Access R Uz Values Day Mode 1 Night Mode Non Parameter AttributesH 3 Pager Motor On Scanner Attribute 5015 Indicates if a pager motor is present in the scanner Type F Size Bytes 1 User Mode Access R Values 0 No pager motor present in scanner 1 Pager motor present in scanner Beeper LED Attribute 6000 Activates the beeper and or LED Type X Size Bytes N A User Mode Access W Values Beep LED Action Value 1 high short beep 0 2 high short beeps 1 3 high short beeps 2 4 high short beeps 3 5 high short beeps 4 1 low short beep 5 2 low short beeps 6 3 low short beeps 7 4 low short beeps 8 5 low short beeps 9 1 high long beep 10 2 high long beeps 11 3 high lo
350. y unpowered and the LED indicator light is solid red the scanner is in pre charge mode It is normal for pre charge mode to last several seconds while the scanner powers up however it can last several minutes if the battery has significantly discharged due to excessive use or storage If the solid red LED condition persists there may be a problem with the battery or the scanner in which case discontinue use of the scanner and contact Motorola Solutions support Table 2 3 Scanner LED Definitions with CRO078 P Cradle Indication Green Solid Blinks off for a decode then turns solid green until the next decode Red Solid Communication error with cradle Table 2 4 CR0078 S CRO0008 S Cradle LED Definitions Indication Green Solid Cradle is powered Green Flash Cradle is externally powered with a USB host interface that suspended the cradle The cradle is no longer connected to the digital scanner but charges the digital scanner Scan the pairing bar code to pair the scanner and cradle see Pairing on page 4 22 Red Flash Transmission error Table 2 5 CR0078 P Cradle LED Definitions Indication Green Solid Cradle is powered scanner not in cradle Fully charged scanner scanner in cradle Green Flash Charging scanner scanner in cradle Red Flash Transmission error Red Solid Charge error scanner in cradle Blue Solid When Page Button is enabled and pressed see Page Button on page 4 28 t
351. ymbol the number of times set via SBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 15 27 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol Disable ISBT Concatenation 0 Enable ISBT Concatenation 1 Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation 2 Symbologies 15 27 Check ISBT Table Parameter 578 The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated Enable Check ISBT Table 1 Disable Check ISBT Table 0 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Parameter 223 If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate use this parameter to set the number of times the digital scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol Scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes to set a value between 2 and 20 Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 The default is 10 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

Motorola DS6878 Barcode Scanner User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents